JP2020120962A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance an interest of a symbol combination mode.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: prior determination means determining a game (a special symbol variable display game) before the game is executed; and display control means displaying on a display device 41 a symbol combination mode corresponding to a game result. As a symbol combination mode, there are many kinds of symbol combination modes (for example, a first small winning symbol, a second small winning symbol, and a third small winning symbol) showing opening frequency different from one another as opening frequency of a variable winning device. Display control means can execute a replacement performance (small winning symbol replacement performance) replacing symbol combination modes to be displayed on the display device 41 when it is determined on the basis of a determination result of the prior determination means that a special game state occurs more than once. In the replacement performance, control to display a symbol combination mode showing total opening frequency of the variable winning device in a plurality of special game states across a plurality of games is performed in place of control to display the symbol combination mode corresponding to the result of the game every time the game is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 58

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on establishment of a start condition and generating a special gaming state in which a variable winning device is opened when the result of the game is a special result.

In a gaming machine equipped with a variable display device capable of displaying a variable display game based on a plurality of pieces of identification information, when the display result of the variable display game is in a small hit result mode, a small hit state that is advantageous to the player is generated. A gaming machine having a possible small hit control means is known (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP2012-176268A

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the symbol combination mode (small hit result mode) that is stopped and displayed when the result of the variable display game is a small hit is not very interesting.
An object of the present invention is to enhance the interest of the symbol combination mode.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1 is
In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which a game is executed based on establishment of a start condition, and a variable winning device is opened when the result of the game is a special result,
Prior determination means for determining the game before the game is executed,
Display control means for displaying a symbol combination mode corresponding to the result of the game on a display device,
In the symbol combination mode, there are a plurality of types of symbol combination modes showing different numbers of times of opening as the number of times of opening the variable winning device,
The display control means,
When it is determined that the special game state occurs a plurality of times based on the determination result of the pre-determination means, it is possible to execute a replacement effect that replaces the symbol combination mode displayed on the display device,
In the replacement effect, each time the game is executed, instead of the control of displaying the symbol combination mode corresponding to the result of the game, the variable winning device in the special game state of the plurality of games over a plurality of games. It is characterized by performing control to display a symbol combination mode showing the total number of times of opening.

According to the present invention, the interest of the symbol combination mode can be enhanced.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in the special game state. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in the special game state. It is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart explaining probability setting change / confirmation processing. It is a figure explaining the display in a performance display apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a special process starting port switch common processing. It is a flow chart explaining special figure reservation information judgment processing. It is a flow chart explaining special figure reservation information judgment processing. It is a flow chart explaining pre-reading big hit judgment processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 game process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 game process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 game process. It is a flowchart explaining a special process 1 normal process. It is a flowchart explaining a special process 2 normal processing. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a falling lottery process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process and a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart explaining fluctuation start information setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining time shortening change frequency update processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a change in special figure 1. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a change in special figure 2. It is a flow chart explaining the processing during the special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart explaining a special figure 2 display processing. It is a flow chart explaining a special figure 2 display processing. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare/during-interval processing. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare/during-interval processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flow chart explaining big hit end setting processing 1 and big hit end setting processing 2. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot end setting processing 3. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is the flowchart which explains the main processing of the production control control equipment. It is a flow chart explaining reception command check processing. It is a flow chart explaining received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart explaining variable system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining variation production setting processing. It is a figure explaining the case where there are a plurality of types of small hits. It is a figure explaining a small hitting pattern. It is the figure which explains the small hit design exchange production. It is the figure which explains the small hit design exchange production. It is the figure which explains the small hit design exchange production. It is the figure which explains the small hit design exchange production. It is the figure which explains the small hit design exchange production. It is the figure which explains the small hit design exchange production. It is the figure which explains the small hit design exchange production. It is the figure which explains the small hit design exchange production. It is the figure which explains the small hit design exchange production. It is a figure explaining an accessory production. It is a figure explaining an accessory production. It is a figure explaining an accessory production. It is a figure explaining an accessory production. It is a figure explaining an accessory production. It is a figure explaining an accessory production. It is a figure explaining an accessory production. It is a figure explaining light emission production. It is the figure which explains the specific production which uses production means.

<First Embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is attached to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable/closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

Further, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, a lamp, an LED, etc. are built in, and decorations and effects, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, the LED, etc., an abnormality notification color (for example, red color). The frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) and the speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is provided below the front frame 12 as well. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b are used to notify the content of the abnormality by voice. In addition, you may make it provide the lamp for alerting|reporting abnormalities in the predetermined part of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, there are an upper plate 21 (reservoir plate) for supplying game balls to a hitting ball launching device (not shown), and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. An upper plate ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower plate (receiving plate) 23 that stores the game balls that have been paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, and an operating unit 24 of the ball striking device are provided. Further, on the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21, there is provided an effect button 25 having an effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
Although the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 may be provided separately from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device may be provided near the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Further, to the right of the effect button 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player rotates the operation unit 24 to cause the hitting ball launching device to launch the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. To do. Further, by the player operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), the effect of the player's operation intervening is displayed. It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a plate-shaped game board body 80 that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls (guide rails) 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30 on the front surface of the game board body 80. The game area 32 is provided. The gaming machine 10 is configured to shoot a game ball from a hitting ball launching device in a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 to play a game. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails and the like are arranged as members for converting the flow direction of the game balls, and the launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40, which forms a window serving as a display area of the variable display game, is attached to the approximate center of the game area 32. A display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is disposed behind the window formed in the center case 40.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). In the area where the image on the display screen can be displayed (display area), a still image or a moving image can be displayed as an effect image, and for example, a plurality of identification information (special symbols) or a character that produces a special figure variable display game, Information about the game such as a background image that enhances the effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is played. Further, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) for effect based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen.

The center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 that operates to produce a game. The board effect device 44 is operable downward from the state shown in FIG.
In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (universal figure starting gate) 34 is provided. Inside the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit in the game area 32 passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, the universal figure variation display game is executed.

Two general winning openings 35 are arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into these general winning openings 35 is detected by a winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning openings 35.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area) for providing a starting condition of the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) is provided. The game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

On the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area) for providing a starting condition of the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) is provided. The game ball that has won the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The normal variation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member (not shown), and this movable member always holds a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which the game ball cannot flow. When the result of the universal figure variation display game reaches a predetermined result, the universal ball 37c (see FIG. 3) as a drive device allows the game ball to easily flow into the regular variation winning device 37 (open state (game). It is possible to change it to an advantageous condition for the person).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the movable member of the ordinary variation winning device 37 is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory that is opened and closed by advancing and retracting (sliding) in the front-back direction by the universal electric solenoid 37c. The movable member of 37 is not limited to this. The movable member of the ordinary variation winning device 37 may be, for example, an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that is opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side by the ordinary electric solenoid 37c, or the ordinary electric solenoid 37c. It may be a tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory that opens in the shape of an inverted "C" depending on.
Further, the normal variation winning device 37 may allow the game ball to win even when the movable member is in the closed state, and may make the game ball less likely to win in the closed state than in the open state.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, between the universal figure starting gate 34 and the normal variation winning device 37, there are a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A convertible first special variation winning device (upper special winning opening) 38 is provided. The first special variation winning device 38 converts the upper special winning opening into a state in which a game ball can flow in by an opening/closing member (not shown) moving forward and backward (sliding). According to the result of the special figure variation display game, the first special variation winning device 38 converts the upper special winning opening from the closed state to the open state, thereby facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the upper special winning opening. , A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game ball that has won the first special variation winning device 38 is detected by the special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3).

Inside the upper special winning opening (winning area), a specific area into which the game ball can flow is provided, and the lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 3) so as to change the probability of the game ball flowing into the specific area. ) Is provided with a lever member. The specific area is provided with a specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 3) capable of detecting the inflow of the game ball, and based on the fact that the specific area switch 38d detects the game ball, the advantageous state for the player is obtained. It occurs (in this embodiment, a high probability state occurs after the special game state ends). The game ball that has flown into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special variation winning device 38.

Further, inside the upper special winning opening, there is provided a residual ball outlet switch 38e (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball discharged to the outside of the first special variation winning device 38 without flowing into a specific area. ing. The number of game balls detected by the special winning opening switch 38a provided inside the upper special winning opening (the number of gaming balls flowing into the upper special winning opening), and the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharging opening switch 38e. It can be confirmed that all the game balls in the upper prize hole have been discharged by matching the number of game balls (the number of game balls discharged from the upper prize hole), and basically until this confirmation is completed. Will not open a new upper prize hole.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, to the right of the starting winning opening 36, a second special variation winning prize that can be converted into a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A device (lower prize winning opening) 39 is provided. The second special variation winning device 39, by opening and closing (not shown) forward and backward (slide), to convert the lower big winning opening into a state in which the game ball can flow. The second special variation winning device 39 converts the closed state of the lower special winning opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variation display game, thereby facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the lower special winning opening. , A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game ball that has won the second special variation winning device 39 is detected by the special winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 3).

The game area 32 below the start winning opening 36 is provided with an outlet 30a for collecting game balls that have not been won in the winning opening or the like.
Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a general figure variation display game are executed on the lower right corner of the game board body 80 outside the game area 32. A collective display device 50 is provided.

The collective display device 50 includes a special segment 1 display unit (first special diagram variation display unit) 51 and a special diagram 2 variation display for a game including a special segment 1 variation display game including a 7-segment type display unit (LED lamp) and the like. Special figure 2 display for game (second special figure variation display section) 52, first memory display section 53 for informing starting number of special figure 1 variation display game composed of LED lamp, and LED lamp And a second memory display unit 54 for informing the number of starting memory of the special figure 2 variable display game configured.

In addition, the collective display device 50 is advantageous to the player among the round display unit 55 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing the special variation winning devices 38 and 39), left hitting (normal hitting) and right hitting. A first game state display unit 56 for notifying how to hit (how to hit corresponding to the game state) and a probability display unit 57 for notifying the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure variation display game are provided. There is. In addition, the collective display device 50, a probability state display unit that displays that the probability state of the big hit is high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, a display that lights up when the big hit occurs and notifies the big hit occurrence A part (display) or the like may be provided.
Further, a public figure display unit 58 for displaying the general figure variable display game, a memory display unit 59 for notifying the number of starting memories of the general figure variable display game, a time saving state that lights when a time saving state occurs and notifies the time saving state occurrence. A notification unit 60 and the like are provided.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 is displayed at the center while the variation display game is being executed, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being executed on the display device 41. The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to 100 msec, for example. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display device 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7 segment is also driven to blink. It is configured such that the fact that it is fluctuating is displayed so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be distinguished. Then, when the result of the game is “out”, for example, the central segment (in addition to the special figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side as a result) is turned on as a result mode of the out, and the result of the game is In the case of “win”, the game result is displayed by turning on a result mode (for example, a number or symbol) other than the off result mode (special result mode).

The first memory display unit 53 turns off a plurality of LEDs for the number of unsuccessful balls (starting memory number=holding number) out of the number of winning balls into the starting winning port 36, which is a variation start condition of the special map 1 display 51. , Is displayed by lighting (blinking).
The second memory display unit 54 displays the number of undigested balls (starting memory number=holding number) among the plurality of LEDs among the number of winning balls to the normal variation winning device 37, which is the variation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52. It is displayed by turning it off and turning it on (blinking).
The round display unit 55 is composed of LED lamps and the like, and turns off all the LEDs when not in the special game state, and turns on the LEDs corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special game state. Turn it on. The round display section 55 may be configured by a 7-segment type display.

The first gaming state display unit 56 is composed of LED lamps and the like. For example, when the player is in a gaming state in which the left hitting is more advantageous to the player than the right hitting (normal hitting), all LEDs are turned off and left. When the right hitting is more advantageous to the player than the hitting (in the right hitting), all the LEDs are turned on.
The probability display unit 57 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the probability state of the big hit is a low probability state (normal probability state), all the LEDs are turned off, and the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state (probability change state). In the case of, all the LEDs are turned on.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls a game in an integrated manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It includes a CPU unit 110 having the same, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillating circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. A DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, or DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic parts such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to be operable. To be done.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit including an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from an AC power supply of 24V and a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as DC 12V, DC 5V from a voltage of 32V DC. 410, a backup power supply section 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to a RAM inside the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game controller 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure, A control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal is provided.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply part 420 and the control signal generation part 430 are on separate substrates or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, the main. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are subject to replacement when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, the cost can be reduced by removing it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 (in particular, the built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 can store and retain the information about the game even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped due to a power failure, and the game can be restarted based on the stored information after the power failure is restored. It constitutes a game information storage holding means. The control signal generation unit 430, for example, monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Further, even when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B stores invariant information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area of various signals and random number values at the time of game control. Used as. An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as starting memory. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, there are tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after reaching the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a pattern is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the special result mode, in the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state that is advantageous for the player (special gaming state), some of the plurality of display results have not been derived and displayed, and have already been derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. Refers to a display mode that does not exist Then, for example, the state in which the variable display is performed by the plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state where the special result forms are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variable display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the result mode is displayed by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the variable display area on the left and right, the condition that satisfies the special result mode (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, at the time when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two variable display areas of the left, the middle, and the right (for example, the same It is also possible to set the state that has become the identification information (excluding the special result mode) as the reach state, and display the remaining one variable display area in a variable manner from this reach state.

Then, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), as reach effects having different possibility of deriving the special result mode (different expected values), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in at least the variable display mode in the case where the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (in the case of a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of sync). Therefore, the state in which the reach state is generated is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit, as compared with the case where the reach state is not generated.

The CPU 111A executes the game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control of the whole 10 is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the symbol of the big hit, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various types). Random pattern generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the reach and the execution time of the variable display game in the variable display without reach, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the general figure variable display game And a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. There is.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A, the game result of the special figure variation display game (big hit, small hit or out), the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state, Based on the number of start-up memories and the like, any one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition unit that acquires any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of a payout unit to drive a payout ball according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on a ball payout request signal from the card unit to perform control for paying out the ball.

In the input section 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111, a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, The winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35, the big winning opening switch 38a in the first special variation winning device 38, the big winning opening switch 39a in the second special variation winning device 39, the gate switch in the universal start gate 34 34a, a specific area switch 38d and a remaining ball outlet switch 38e arranged in the first special variation winning device 38, an out ball detection switch 32a for detecting all the game balls that have been launched into the game area 32 and finished the game. An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 which is connected to the switch and receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches and converts the signal into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. Is provided. Since the input range of the proximity I/F 121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or the proximity switch is illegally short-circuited, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut to float. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above, and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124 or the fourth input port 126 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, the special winning opening switches 38a and 39a, and the gate switch 34a are input to the second input port 123. To be done. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the specific area switch 38d, the remaining ball discharging switch 38e, and the out ball detecting switch 32a are input to the fourth input port 126. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124.

Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a fraudulent detection magnetic sensor 61 provided in the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10, a detection signal of a vibration sensor 65 that detects vibration of the gaming machine 10, a gaming machine. The detection signal of the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of 10 and the detection signal of the main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. It has become.

Further, a signal from the setting key switch 152 that detects the operation of the setting key operation unit is input to the third input port 124. The setting key operation unit is provided with a keyhole into which the setting key is inserted, and is configured so that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. .. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it has been turned to the second position. When the setting key switch 152 is turned to the second position, it is turned on, and when it is not turned to the second position. If there is, it is turned off.

The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit are operation units for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which the probability value that will be a special result in the special figure variation display game is assigned, and operate these operation units. By doing so, you can select the probability setting value to which the probability value that will be a special result is assigned in the special figure variation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value will be used in the game. There is. Here, six probability setting values “setting 1” to “setting 6” are prepared.

When selecting the probability setting value, the probability setting value is set by turning on the power of the gaming machine while operating (depressing) the RAM initialization switch 112 with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position. Can be changed, and the probability setting value can be changed by operating (pressing) the RAM initialization switch 112 in the probability setting value changing mode. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and accessory ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays the probability setting value information while operating the probability setting value (while in the probability setting value changing mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode), and other than that. Displays the calculated base value and character ratio.

In addition, by turning on the power of the gaming machine with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position (the RAM initialization switch 112 is not operated), the currently selected probability set value is the performance display device. Although it is displayed in 153, the probability setting value confirmation mode in which the probability setting value cannot be changed is set. Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment type display, and is adapted to display the probability setting value by numbers 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode can be used as long as the probability setting value can be recognized. Further, other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or the probability setting value may be indicated by the lighting mode or emission color of one or more LEDs.

Further, of the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 and the output to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out ball detection switch 32a) are transferred from the main board 100 to the relay board 70. It is also designed to be supplied to a test-firing test device (not shown). Furthermore, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. Has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is read by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 to assert (enable) the enable signal CE2. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, to the input unit 120, a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on a radio wave detected by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be accepted), a payout abnormality status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (Signal output when detecting that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full)), touch switch signal (input to the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) There is provided a first input port 122 which takes in a signal based on the above) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input section 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the above-mentioned various switches. This is because the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-shooting test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124, 126 of the input section 120. The data set in the ports of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET needs to be reset in order to prevent a malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is performed so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for notifying special test symbol information of the variable display game to a test shooting test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating a probability state of a big hit via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-production product) installed in a game shop. It should be noted that the detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting port switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test-shooting test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor 61, the board radio wave sensor 62, and the vibration sensor 65 that cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as they are are once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, in the game. As an error signal indicating that the machine is in a state where the game cannot be controlled, it is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test-shooting test apparatus through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying it to the test-shooting test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. There is. The chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test-shooting test device.

The output unit 130 is also provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140. The second output port 134 is a first special winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b that opens the first special variation winning device 38, and a second big winning opening solenoid (large) that opens the second special variation winning device 39. The winning opening solenoid 2) 39b, the operation data of the lever solenoid 38f for operating the lever member in the first special variation winning device 38, and the universal electric solenoid 37c for opening the normal variation winning device 37 are output and are currently selected. It is a port for outputting the display data of the performance display device 153 displaying the probability setting value.
Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. The fourth output port 136 for outputting ON/OFF data of the digit line connected to the cathode terminal of the LED is provided.

The output unit 130 is also provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game shop, for example, and information about the gaming machine 10 can be displayed. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the operation data signals of the special winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b, the lever solenoid 38f, and the universal electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. A driver (drive circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal of a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and a fourth output port 136. A third driver 138c that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50, and an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device, to the external information terminal board 71. A fourth driver 138d for outputting and a fifth driver 138e for receiving and displaying a display data signal of the performance display device 153 output from the second output port 134 and generating and outputting a drive signal are provided. Data is transmitted from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e by serial communication.

The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. The fifth driver 138e is supplied with DC5V as the power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive the performance display device 153 operating at 5V.
Further, DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line according to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic driving method is performed by causing a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V and drawing out a current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs selected in sequence and the LEDs are turned on.
The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V.
The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided not on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the main board, but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the data transmission/reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, 124, 126 are provided. Absent.

It should be noted that, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the winning opening switch 35a, the special winning opening switches 38a, 39a, the gate For the switch 34a, a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter, referred to as a proximity switch) is used that includes a coil for magnetic detection and uses a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil to detect a game ball. Has been done. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 or the like is a micro switch having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The production control device 300 is for displaying an image on the display device 41 according to a command and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 including an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 has a program ROM 321, which is a PROM (programmable read only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and retains stored contents even when power is not supplied during a power failure. A possible FeRAM 323 and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 which is a time counting means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the content of the effect and instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to give a reproduced sound, lights a decorative lamp, and drives the motor. And drive control of solenoids, management of production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, it is possible to transmit commands and data in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30, a synchronization signal for giving a data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to INT and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as completion of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 is provided. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Via this command I/F331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300 are changed to the effect control command signal (effect command). ) As. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the glass frame 15 are provided. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances effect effects in cooperation with effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control the lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address/data bus 340. In addition, even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device including a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating an effect device), and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device is provided. good.

Further, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. Which detects the ON/OFF state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 is provided which has a function of detecting a signal and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a direct-current voltage of a desired level to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled by the same, and thus drives a motor and a solenoid. DC32V, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, DC5V serving as a power supply voltage for the command I/F 331, and a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker. Is configured to. Furthermore, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC- for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. Further, in the form of being output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET that drive and control the lamp and the motor). Signals) to put them in a reset state. In addition, the production control device 300 is connected to a cooling FAN 45 that cools each part of the gaming machine 10, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the production control device 300 is powered on.

FIG. 5 shows the jackpot probability, the fall probability, the small hit probability, and the jackpot type distribution probability when the big hit is won. The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure variation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric role as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38, 39 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is operated). When the condition device does not operate, it means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Further, the "conditional device" is a term that is generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term that has different meanings.

The value of the big hit probability (probability value), which is the probability of being a big hit (first special result), is common in special figure 1 and special figure 2, and the probability value in the low probability state and the probability value in the high probability state are respectively The probability value is as shown in FIG.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, the same probability value is assigned as the probability value in the high probability state to all of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, but different probability values are set. A value may be assigned. That is, the probability value in the high probability state may be switchable in multiple stages.
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, the same probability value is assigned to “setting 1” and “setting 2” as the probability values in the low probability state, but different probability values are assigned. It may be assigned. The same applies to “setting 3” and “setting 4” and “setting 5” and “setting 6”. That is, the number of stages is not limited as long as the probability value in the low probability state can be switched in multiple stages. Further, the same probability value may be assigned to all of the “setting 1” to “setting 6” as the probability value in the low probability state. That is, the probability value in the low probability state may not be switchable in multiple stages.

Further, the effect distribution and the like may be different for the assigned “setting 1” and “setting 2” with the same probability value in the low probability state. The same applies to “setting 3” and “setting 4” and “setting 5” and “setting 6”.
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, six probability setting values (“setting 1” for three types of probability values (probability value in a low probability state and probability value in a high probability state)) are set. "-"Setting 6") are assigned, but three probability setting values (for example, "setting 1"-"setting 3") are assigned to three types of probability values, and the remaining three probability setting values (for example, "setting 6") are assigned. "Setting 4" to "Setting 6") may not be used.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in a special game state based on a big hit (first special game state), a game ball flows into a specific region (probability change operation region) of the first special variation winning device 38 and is detected by the specific region switch 38d. By doing (passing V), it becomes a high probability state after the end of the special game state, and becomes a low probability state when winning the falling lottery performed every time the special figure variation display game is executed. The probability of winning the falling lottery is as shown in FIG. 5(b).
In addition, even if a high probability state is reached based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game, that is, the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, Both are in high probability states.

The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is as shown in FIG. 5(c). This small hit probability is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. Further, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state or the big hit probability. In the big hit and small hit lottery, the big hit and the small hit are not overlapped and won. In addition, in the present embodiment, the small hit is not provided in the special figure 1 but is provided only in the special figure 2, that is, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0, but the present invention is not limited to this. May be provided in both special figure 1 and special figure 2. Further, when the small hits are provided on both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the small hit probability may be the same between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, or the special figure 2 is more preferable than the special figure 1. May be higher, or the special figure 1 may be higher than the special figure 2.

Further, FIG. 5D shows jackpot types selectable between Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 and the distribution probabilities of each jackpot type.
There are three types of big hits (first special results) in the special figure 1 variable display game: 10R certainty change big hits, 4R certainty change big hits, and 10R normal big hits. Similarly, there are three types of big hits (first special results) in the special figure 2 variable display game: 10R certainty change big hits, 4R certainty change big hits, and 10R normal big hits. These jackpot types are selected based on the jackpot symbol random number. The number of each jackpot type indicates the number of actual rounds, and the probability variation indicates that the game ball is likely to flow into a specific area (probability variation operation area) and tends to be in a high probability state (probability variation state) after the special game state ends. , Normal indicates that a game ball is unlikely to flow into a specific area (probability variation operation area) and is unlikely to be in a high probability state (probability variation state) after the special game state ends.
Here, the actual number of rounds is the number of rounds for which opening control is performed so that a winning ball is actually generated by opening the special variation winning devices 38, 39. The number of each jackpot type is the number of rounds at the time of jackpot (the actual number of rounds + the number of rounds for which the opening time of the special variation winning devices 38 and 39 is short and the winning control is not actually performed). May be.

Further, the first special result may be provided in which the possibility of the game ball flowing into the specific region is lower than that of the probability variation big hit, but the possibility of the game ball flowing into the specific region is higher than that of the normal big hit.
Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, whether or not a high probability state is reached is determined by whether or not a game ball flows into a specific area (probability change operation area), so even if the jackpot type is a probable change, it is specified. If the game ball does not flow into the area, the high probability state does not occur. Even if the big hit type is normal, if the game ball flows into the specific area, the high probability state occurs.

6(a) to 6(c) show the manner of opening in each round in each jackpot type. Details of the opening mode are shown in FIG. 7.
As shown in FIG. 6A, in the 10R probability variation big hit, the V special long opening is performed in which the first special variation winning device 38 is opened and the specific area (probability variation operation area) is opened in the first round. V Yes Long Open is an opening mode in which the game ball is highly likely to flow into a specific area (probability change operation area). Then, in the second and subsequent rounds, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened, and V-less long opening is performed.
As shown in FIG. 6B, in the 4R probability variation big hit, the V special long opening is performed in which the first special variation winning device 38 is opened and the specific area (probability variation operation area) is opened in the first round. Then, from the 2nd round to the 4th round, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened. Do not open the specific area. Do not open V. Short open. The V-less short opening is an opening mode in which the possibility of a game ball flowing into the special winning opening is lower than the V-free long opening. That is, the V-less long opening is an opening mode in which a winning ball is actually generated, and the V-less short opening is an opening mode in which the opening time is short and the winning ball is not actually generated.

As shown in FIG. 6(c), in the 10R normal big hit, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened in the first round, and a V-shaped short-circuit opening for opening a specific region (probability change operating region) is performed. There is a possibility that the game ball will flow into the specific area (probability change operation area) with V, and the short opening is an opening mode lower than with V and the long opening. After the second round, the V-free long opening for opening the first special variation winning device 38 is performed.
The game balls can be flowed into the specific area (probability change operation area) only in the V-long open and V-short open which are performed in the first round. That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the specific round, which is a round in which the game ball may flow into the specific area, is the first round. The specific round is not limited to the first round and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the specific round may be repeated a plurality of times such as the first round and the fifth round.

As shown in FIG. 7A, in the V-free long opening, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened at the start of the round (t11), and the openable time of 25000 msec elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces). When any one of the conditions for winning the game ball of (1) is satisfied, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed and the round is finished (t12). After that, the processing time for remaining balls in the upper prize hole is started (t12), the interval time is started when the processing time for remaining balls in the upper prize hole is ended (t13), and the next round is started when the interval time is ended (t14). ). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set with the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

As shown in FIG. 7B, in the V-long opening, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t31). Further, with the start of the round, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on and the specific area switch 38d is enabled. When the lever solenoid 38f is OFF, the lever member covers the specific area and the game ball cannot enter, and when the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever member retracts from the specific area and the game ball can enter. Becomes Further, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is valid is a state in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d is treated as valid. On the other hand, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is invalid is a state in which even if the specific area switch 38d detects a game ball, it is treated as invalid.

The lever solenoid 38f is turned off after 64 msec has elapsed from the start of the round (t32). Then, 100 m seconds after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t33). That is, there is a possibility that the game ball won immediately after the first special variation winning device 38 is opened may flow into the specific area.

When 200 msec has elapsed from the start of the round, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed (t34). Then, after the elapse of 2700 msec, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened again (t35), either the openable time of 25000 msec elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls are won. When the conditions are satisfied, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed and the round is finished (t39). After that, the processing time for processing the remaining sphere of the special winning opening is started (t39), the interval time is started when the processing time for the remaining sphere of the upper winning opening is completed (t41), and the next round is started when the interval time is completed (t42). .. In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set with the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

Further, after the second opening of the first special variation winning device 38 (t35), the lever solenoid 38f is also turned on for a predetermined time (t36 to t37, t38 to t39). Also, the specific area switch 38d becomes effective (t36). The second opening of the first special variation winning device 38 is a sufficiently long time of opening, and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f also continues for a long time, so that the game ball almost certainly flows into the specific area. Become. Therefore, if the type of jackpot is a certain change, it will almost certainly be a high-probability state.

Further, the lever solenoid 38f can be kept in the ON state for a predetermined time even after the first special variation winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43), and flows into the first special variation winning device 38 just before closing. It is possible for the game balls to flow into a specific area. It should be noted that the first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the elapse of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls winning, and the game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is the upper special winning opening remaining ball processing. If all of them are discharged within the time, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off with the end of the remaining ball processing time (t41), the operation is ended, and the specific area switch 38d is invalidated.

In addition, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed due to the elapse of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls winning, and the gaming balls that have won the first special variation winning device 38 are the upper major winning hole remaining ball processing time. If not completely discharged, and if all are discharged by the end of the period (t43) in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state, the lever solenoid 38f will be in the OFF state at the completion of the discharge and operate. And the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid.
In addition, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed due to the elapse of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls winning, and the gaming balls that have won the first special variation winning device 38 are the upper major winning hole remaining ball processing time. If not all are discharged by the end (t43) of the period when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state, the end of the period when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43). Then, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the operation is completed. In this case, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t44) 100 msec after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t43).

As shown in FIG. 7C, in the V-opened short opening, the same opening as the first opening of the first special variation winning device 38 in the V-opened long opening is performed (t51 to t54), and the opening is completed. The round is ended based on (t54). The opening of the first special variation winning device 38 is for a very short time, and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f is also for a short time, so that there is a low possibility that the game ball will flow into the specific area. Therefore, when the type of jackpot is normal, it is rare that a high-probability state occurs.

It should be noted that the operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the valid/invalid switching of the specific area switch 38d perform the same operation as in the case where the game ball remains in the first special variation winning device 38 and the V is long open ( t55 to t63). Therefore, when the game ball remains in the first special variation winning device 38 even after the upper special winning opening remaining ball processing time has elapsed, the lever solenoid 38f is in the OFF state when the discharge of the remaining ball is completed. Then, the operation ends, and the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid. Further, if all the game balls are not discharged by the end of the period when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t62), the lever solenoid 38f is turned OFF at the end of the period when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t62). The specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t63) 100 msec after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t62) and the operation is completed.

Further, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened for the first time (t31 to t34) in the V present long opening shown in FIG. 7B, and the first special variation in the V present short opening shown in FIG. 7C. The opening (t51 to t54) of the winning device 38 is set to an opening time such that at least one game ball can be won in the first special variation winning device 38.

As shown in FIG. 7(d), in the V-less short opening, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t71), and the 200 msec openable time has elapsed or a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces). When any one of the conditions for winning the game ball of () is established, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed and the round is finished (t72). However, since the openable time is short, it is rare that a predetermined number of winnings, which are the closing conditions, are generated, and most of the time, the game is closed as the openable time elapses. After that, the processing time for processing the remaining balls of the special winning opening is started (t72), the interval time is started when the processing time of the remaining remaining balls for the special winning opening is ended (t73), and when the interval time is ended, the next round is started (t74). ). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set with the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

In addition, FIG. 6D shows an opening state in the second special game state (special game state based on small hit). In the second special game state, first, the small hit fanfare time is started, and when the small hit fanfare time is finished, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, and the openable time of 1600 msec has elapsed or a predetermined number (for example, The second special variable winning device 39 is closed when any of the conditions of winning nine (9) game balls is established. After that, when the small hit remaining ball processing time is started and the small hit remaining ball processing time is ended, the small hit ending time is started, and when the small hit ending time is ended, the second special game state is ended. There may be a plurality of types of opening modes (opening time and number of times of opening) in the second special game state. In that case, which opening mode is set (adopted) is determined based on, for example, a small hit symbol. ..

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (shift) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state in the present embodiment.
The gaming state includes a normal gaming state ST1, a first specific gaming state ST2, and a second specific gaming state ST3. In addition to this, as special game states, there are a first special game state based on the first special result (big hit) and a second special game state based on the second special result (small hit), but they are omitted here. In each game state, the special figure probability that the first special result to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived, the production mode that is controlled by the production control device 300 to determine the production mode of the game, and is mainly in the game state. The main starting area which is the starting area to be targeted, the main variation special figure which is the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed mainly, and the launch direction of the game ball are defined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, left-handed striking can be aimed at the starting winning opening 36, and right-hand striking can be aimed at the normal variable winning device 37. That is, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's intention. In each gaming state, the game is designed assuming that one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly played, and the player follows the design to play the game. It is configured such that it is advantageous for the player to proceed with the game mainly in the one special figure variation display game which is determined to be the main one in the design so as to proceed. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be main in each gaming state may be referred to as a main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as an irregular variation.

In the normal game state ST1, the special figure probability is a low probability state, and there is no special electric power support for improving the opening time per unit time of the normal variation winning device 37 to facilitate the winning, and there is no special figure variation display game or normal This is a state in which there is no time reduction to reduce the variation time of the figure variation display game. Further, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is the normal mode. The main variation special figure is a special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the firing direction is left-handed to aim at this starting winning opening 36. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be the main variation, and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation. In this normal game state ST1, a very long variation time is set for the special figure 2 variation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in time, and the player is prevented from selecting the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming to obtain a small hit in the normal gaming state ST1. ..

The second specific game state ST3 is a state where the special figure probability is basically low. However, when a game ball flows into a specific area (probability change operation area) of the first special variation winning device 38 (in the case of V passage) in a special game state based on a normal jackpot, the state is a high probability state. In addition, there is a usual electric power support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is POD support, there will be a time saving to shorten the variation time of the special map variable display game and the universal map variable display game. The production mode that defines the production mode is the chance mode. In addition, the main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the normal variable winning a prize device 37, and the aiming direction of the normal variable winning a prize device 37 is a rightward striking. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is designed to be the main variation, and the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be the irregular variation.

In the first specific game state ST2, the special figure probability is a high-probability state, and there is no normal electric power support for improving the opening time per unit time of the normal variation winning device 37 to facilitate the winning, and there is no special figure variation display game. It is in a state where there is a reduction in the time required to shorten the fluctuation time. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is a small hit RUSH. In addition, the main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the normal variable winning a prize device 37, and the aiming direction of the normal variable winning a prize device 37 is a rightward striking. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is designed to be the main variation, and the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be the irregular variation.

In the present embodiment, the probability that the hit result of the universal figure variation display game in the state with the universal communication support (normal figure probability) is the same probability as the state without the universal communication support (normal probability). However, in the state where there is universal communication support, the universal figure probability can be set to a high probability (typical figure high probability state) higher than the normal probability (typical figure low probability state).
In addition, in the present embodiment, the state in which there is no ordinary electric power support means that the ordinary variable prize device 37 is opened, but the opening time per unit time of the ordinary variable prize device 37 is shorter than that in the state where the ordinary electric prize support is provided. is there.

In the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes shorter than that in the normal game state ST1, and right-handed to perform the normal variation winning device 37. It is more advantageous for the player to play the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at The special figure 2 variable display game has a higher probability of a small hit than the special figure 1 variable display game (in the present embodiment, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0), and the small hit is won rather than the big hit. Since the probability of doing is high, a small hit frequently occurs in the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3.
When the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the second specific game state ST3, the state with the normal electric power support continues even in the special game state based on the small hit, and in the first specific game state ST2. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the state without normal electric power support continues even in the special game state based on the small hit. In the special game state based on the small hit, the second special variation winning device 39 is opened, but the first special variation winning device 38 is not opened (see FIG. 6(d)).

Therefore, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the second specific game state ST3, in the special game state based on the small hit, most of the right-handed game balls are ordinary variation prizes. The device 37 is won and does not flow down to the second special variable winning device 39 arranged below the normal variable winning device 37. Therefore, in the second specific game state ST3, a small hit occurs frequently, but it is difficult to increase the player's ball with the small hit.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the first specific game state ST2, in the special game state based on the small hit, most of the right-handed game balls are normal variation prizes. Instead of winning the prize in the device 37, the coin flows down to the second special variable prize device 39 arranged below the normal variable prize device 37. Therefore, in the first specific game state ST2, it is easy to increase the game balls of the player by a small hit. That is, in the first specific game state ST2, a small hit occurs frequently and the player's ball is increased, so the effect mode is a mode called small hit RUSH.

Of these three game states, the normal game state ST1 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The second specific game state ST3 is a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST1 because there is a universal electric power support. The first specific game state ST2 is a high-probability state, and is a state in which the player's playing ball increases due to the frequent occurrence of small hits. Therefore, the player has more chances than the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3. It is in an advantageous state.

The transition of the game state is performed by ending the first special game state based on the derivation of the first special result, consuming the prescribed number of games, and winning the falling lottery that is the transition lottery to the low probability state. .. Basically, the probability variation big hit is derived and becomes the first special game state, and in the first special game state, the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variation operation area) of the first special variation winning device 38 to switch the specific area. When it is detected at 38d (when there is V passage), after the end of the first special game state, the process moves to the first specific game state ST2. On the other hand, if the probability variation big hit is derived and becomes the first special game state, and the game ball does not flow into the specific region (probability variation operation region) of the first special variation winning device 38 in the first special game state (no V passage) In the case of), after the end of the first special game state, the game state shifts to the normal game state ST1. In addition, the normal big hit is derived and becomes the first special game state, and if there is no V passage in the first special game state, after the end of the first special game state, the second specific game state ST3 (special figure low probability The game proceeds to the second specific game state ST3). On the other hand, if the normal jackpot is derived and becomes the first special game state, and there is V passage in the first special game state, after the end of the first special game state, the second specific game state ST3 (special figure high probability The game proceeds to the second specific game state ST3).
In addition, in the second specific game state ST3, when the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, the normal game state ST1 is entered. In addition, when the falling lottery is won in the first specific game state ST2, the game state shifts to the normal game state ST1.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game. Further, when the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game. Further, when the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a hit (special result). Moreover, when the first special game state, which is a special game state based on the big hit, and the second special game state, which is a special game state based on the small hit, are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special game state.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is performed by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) toward a game area 32 from a hitting ball launching device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the universal figure starting gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , A winning opening 36, a normal variation winning device 37, a first special variation winning device 38 or a second special variation winning device 39, or flows into the outlet 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 to enter the game area It is discharged from 32. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, the first special variation winning device 38, or the second special variation winning device 39, the number corresponding to the type of the winning opening. Prize balls are discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the firing force and shoots a game ball to the left-side game area (so-called left-handed hit) so that the starting winning opening 36 or the left side of the starting winning opening 36. It is possible to aim for a prize in the provided general winning opening 35, and by launching a game ball to the right-side game area (so-called right hitting), the universal figure starting gate 34, the normal variation winning device 37, and the first special variation winning prize. The device 38, the second special variation winning device 39, and the general winning opening 35 arranged to the right of the second special variation winning device 39 can be aimed at.

Inside the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided, and it is driven into the game area 32. When the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the number of memory for starting normal figure starting is the upper limit number (for example, 4) based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the starting gate for normal figure 34. If less than), the number of ordinary figure starting memory is added (+1) and one ordinary figure starting memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The number of stored universal figure starting prizes is displayed on the universal figure hold indicator 56 of the collective display device 50. Further, in the universal figure starting memory, a random number value for determination of hit (random number value for determination) for determining the result of the universal figure variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when there is a general figure starting memory and the general figure variable display game can be started, that is, the general figure variable display game is not being executed, the general figure variable display game hits and the normal variable prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If the hit state is not the hit state, the hit judgment random number value stored in the most commonly stored figure start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit/miss of the figure change display game. Then, the process of starting the universal figure variation display game is performed. When the random number for hit determination coincides with the determination value, the general figure variable display game becomes a win and a specific result mode (normal figure specification result) is derived.

Further, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns for a predetermined variation time in the public figure display unit 58 provided in the collective display device 50 as a process of executing the general figure variable display game. After performing the universal figure changing display which is repeatedly displayed in the given order, the processing for displaying the universal figure changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed. It should be noted that the public figure display unit 58 is configured by the display device 41, and, for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc. are normally used as the identification information, and after this is variably displayed for a predetermined time, the result is displayed by being stopped and displayed. It may be configured.

When the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, the regular pattern display unit 58 stops and displays the lighting pattern which is a special result mode, and also activates the universal electric solenoid 37c to move the movable member of the ordinary variation winning device 37. Control to open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) is performed. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). In addition, when the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is off, control is performed to display a lighting pattern on the general figure display unit 58 as a result mode of the misalignment.

The winning ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided inside. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first starting memory forming the starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning in the starting winning opening 36 is limited to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4). In addition to being stored, a second starting memory, which is a starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37, is stored within a predetermined upper limit (for example, four). Based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random value are extracted as starting memory information, respectively, and the extracted random numbers. The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first starting memory or the second starting memory. The number of memories of the start memory is the first memory display section 53 (special figure 1 reserved display) and the second memory display section 54 (special figure 2 reserved display) for notifying the number of starting prizes of the collective display device 50. And the display device 41 of the center case 40 also displays as a decoration special figure starting memory display.

The game control device 100 plays the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 (first variation display device) based on the first starting memory, and the special figure 2 display device 52 (based on the second starting memory). A special figure 2 variable display game is played on the second variable display device). The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but while one special figure variable display game is running, the other special figure variable display game has the first special result (big hit). In such a case, the one special figure variation display game is ended as a result (disappearance result) other than the special result. In addition, when one of the special figure variation display games is the second special result (small hit) during execution of the one special figure variation display game, the other one until the special game state based on the small hit is finished. The special figure variable display game is interrupted.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area). It constitutes a first execution control means for controlling. In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 of the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable prize device 37 (second start prize area). It constitutes second execution control means for performing execution control.

In the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, after performing the variable display, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 is the special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit and becomes the first special game state (so-called big hit state). In addition, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the special result mode (the small hit result mode) in which the display mode of the special map 1 display 51 or the special map 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result It becomes a small hit and becomes the second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special figure 1 display 51 constitutes a first variable display means capable of displaying the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening 36. In addition, the special figure 2 display 52 constitutes a second variation display means capable of displaying a second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on winning of a game ball to the normal variation winning device 37.

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100, after the end of the big hit game state (first special game state), is in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (the probability of hit is high probability It is possible to perform control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can be advanced with the support. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 constitutes a specific game state generation means.

Further, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the decoration special figure variation in which a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) is variably displayed on the display device 41 The display game is now running. The decoration special figure variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decoration special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and a decoration special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. Yes, these are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variable display is performed according to the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed along with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

In other words, the display device 41 variably displays the ornament identification information corresponding to the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). It is a decorative variable display means capable of displaying a decorative special figure variable display game). Note that different display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one decorative special figure variable display game may be displayed. Further, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the probability of a small hit is higher in the special figure 2 variable display game (the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is 0), but is special in the normal gaming state. FIG. 2 As the variation pattern of the variation display game, long variation having a very long variation time (about 10 minutes) is selected. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in time in the normal game state, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming to win the small hit in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is more advantageous for the player to hit left and aim at the start winning opening 36 to play the special figure 1 variable display game.
The time for long fluctuation is set to about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.). In addition, the time of long fluctuation may be changed according to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game. Specifically, for example, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a miss or a small hit, a long variation of about 10 minutes is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game, When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, a long variation of about 5 minutes may be selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 performed at a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 9, first, a process of prohibiting an interrupt (step X1) is performed, and then a stack pointer which is a top address of an area for saving a value of a register or the like when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step X2) for setting is set. Next, the register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the higher order, and the leading 00h is set in step X4. Next, a signal to stop firing is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step X5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the firing, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, by setting a predetermined initial value, a sub-control unit (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from the game control device 100 that is the main control unit. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. It forms a standby means for setting the standby time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register or the like which is not a validity determination target) which is not a target of a RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, and thus it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X8). If a power failure has occurred (step X8; Y), the power supply of the gaming machine is determined. Wait for the cutoff.
Specifically, in step X8, for example, the number of times (for example, twice) the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set, and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. Determine if there is. Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the set number of checks. Then, if the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks, the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X54 described later. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power shutdown are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure has not occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step X10; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of determining whether a power failure has occurred (step X8). When the value of the timer is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, when the waiting time has expired, the access permission of the read/write memory (RWM) such as RAM and EEPROM is allowed (step S10). X11), OFF data is output to all output ports (set to no output) (step X12).

Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step X13), and the gaming microcomputer is set. A process (step X14) of activating a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.
Then, the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X15). Here, the RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register on the assumption that the RAM has abnormality regardless of whether the RAM has abnormality.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step X16). If the value is normal (step X16; Y), the power failure inspection in the RWM is performed. It is determined whether the value of the area 2 is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), a checksum calculation process (step X18) for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed, and the calculated checksum and power-off It is determined whether the checksums of the two match (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y), there is no abnormality in the RAM, so the RAM abnormality flag is cleared (step X20), and the process proceeds to step X21.

Further, if it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X16;N or step X17;N), and if it is determined that the checksums do not match (step X19;N), the step is performed. Based on the state read in X6, it is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the ON state (step X21). Then, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22; Y), there is an abnormality in the RAM, so a command for main abnormality error notification for notifying that the game control device 100 is abnormal is produced on the control board (production control). Device 300) (step X24).

On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23). Then, if the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23; Y), the main abnormality error notification command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag set here is a probability setting flag set before the occurrence of a power failure. That is, when the power supply of the game machine is cut off and restarted during the change of the probability setting value, the operation of the game control device 100 is stopped, and therefore the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X25). As a result, the performance display device 153 provides a display as shown in FIG. After that, the ON data of the security signal is output and the OFF data of signals other than the security signal are output (step X26), and the process returns to step X25.

If both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X27; N), the probability setting changing flag is set (step X29). As a result, the probability setting value change mode is entered. After that, the command of which probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X30), and the process proceeds to step X31. In the production control device 300, on the basis of receiving the command of changing the probability setting, the display of the display device 41, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board production device 44, the speakers 19a, 19b. Is output to notify that the probability setting value is being changed.
On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), the probability setting value is cleared (step X28). As a result, 0 is set in the area for the probability setting value in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes “setting 1”. After that, the processes of steps X29 and X30 are performed, and the process proceeds to step X31.

Further, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the OFF state (step X21; N), and neither the RAM abnormality flag nor the probability setting changing flag is set (step X22; N and step X23). ;N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). If the setting key switch 152 is not on (step X35; N), it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on based on the state read in step X6 (step X43).

When it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not in the on state (step X43; N), that is, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the off state, the process proceeds to step X41 and the power failure occurs. Perform the processing when it is restored normally.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the on state (step X43; Y), the process proceeds to step X44 to perform initialization processing. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Form a means of conversion.

If the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state (step X35; Y), the probability setting confirmation flag is set (step X36). As a result, the mode shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode. After that, the command for confirming the probability setting is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X37). In the production control device 300, on the basis of receiving the command during confirmation of the probability setting, the display of the display device 41, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board production device 44, the speakers 19a, 19b. The notification that the probability setting value is being confirmed is output by outputting a voice.

Then, in order to guarantee the output of the security signal for 50 msec or more, the value corresponding to 128 msec is saved in the security signal control timer area (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change/confirmation process (step X122) of the timer interrupt process in the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode, and in other cases, the external information of the timer interrupt process is edited. It is output in the process (step X120). Therefore, when the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 msec, the security signal is continuously output by the external information editing process (step X120) of the timer interrupt process. That is, even when the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 msec, the security signal is output for 128 msec after the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode is entered. R. The value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to the value corresponding to 128 msec. However, since it is necessary to output the security signal for at least 50 msec after shifting to the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode, it is necessary to save the value corresponding to 50 msec or more.

Then, interruption is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33). In step X33, the state (current state) read in the input process (step X103) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is not determined based on the state read in step X6 (state at power-on). Judgment based on If it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the off state, the probability setting value is confirmed.
If the setting key switch 152 is not in the off state (step X33; N), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X34), and if no power failure has occurred (step X34; N), the procedure proceeds to step X33. Returning to this, when a power failure has occurred (step X34; Y), the process proceeds to step X55. When it is determined in step X34 that a power failure has occurred with the probability setting changing flag set, in step X23 of the main process (FIGS. 9 and 10) after the power failure is recovered, It is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33; Y), the process of inhibiting interruption (step X38) is performed. The timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec) between the process of permitting the interrupt (step X32) and the process of inhibiting the interrupt (steps X38, X55). .. In the timer interrupt processing, probability setting change/confirmation processing (step X122), which is processing related to the probability setting value, is performed. That is, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability setting value is completed (or a power failure occurs).
Next, the command of notification end is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X39). The effect control device 300 ends the notification in progress (notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed or notification that the probability setting value is being confirmed) based on receiving the notification end command. ..

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40), and when the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X40; N), that is, when the probability setting confirming flag is set. Performs a power failure recovery process (step X41) that performs a process of saving the initial value at the time of power recovery in an area to be initialized (for example, a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring). The probability setting confirmation flag is cleared in step X41.
After that, a command for power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X42), and the process proceeds to step X47. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X42, a plurality of model designation commands, probability setting information commands, special figure 1 hold number commands, special figure 2 hold number commands, probability information commands, performance number information commands, screen designation commands, etc. Send a command. As a command for specifying a screen, if both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in the normal processing described later, that is, if the special figure variable display game is not being executed and is not in the special game state, it is waiting for a customer. Send the command on the customer waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command on the recovery screen. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, a high-probability-number-of-times information command or the like is also transmitted.

On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM areas other than the probability setting value are cleared to 0 (step X44). In step X44, the RAM area for the probability setting value (work area (1 byte area of the probability setting value)) and the RAM area for displaying performance (displaying the base value and character ratio) (work area and stack area) are cleared. Instead, the RAM area (work area and stack area) for game control is cleared to 0. Therefore, the probability setting changing flag is cleared in step X44. In step X44, the stack area and the unused area may or may not be cleared.

Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X45). The area to be initialized here is an area related to the customer waiting demonstration area and the setting of the effect mode. Then, the command for RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X46). In the case of the present embodiment, in step X46, a model designation command, a probability setting information command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a performance number information command, a RAM initialization command (customer wait While displaying the demo screen, a plurality of commands such as a command for informing the RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a support number information command, a support number information command which is information on the number of times the special figure variation display game with normal electric power support is executed, and the like are transmitted.

Next, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X47). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposed pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. A bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). Is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining the winning symbol of the special drawing). (Big hit symbol random number, Small hit symbol random number), Random number that determines the hit of the ordinary figure (random number per hit), RWM as the initial value (start value) of the random number that determines whether or not to win the falling lottery After saving the data in the predetermined area (step X48), the interruption is permitted (step X49). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step X50) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. Is configured. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as the unit of timer interrupt processing. In addition, in the big hit design random number, the small hit design random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number, the so-called "initial value changing method" that changes the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number makes a round Is adopted. Each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random-type update in which all the values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.
In addition, in the present embodiment, since there is no random number (hit symbol random number) for determining the hit symbol of the universal symbol, there is only one type of hit symbol of the universal symbol, but the hit symbol of the universal symbol is provided by providing the hit symbol random number. May be selected from a plurality of types.

After the initial value random number updating process of step X50, a process of inhibiting interruption (step X51) is performed, and a performance display editing process (step X52) is performed. Then, after performing the process of permitting interruption (step X53), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (step X54). If no power failure has occurred (step X54; N), an initial value random number updating process Return to (Step X50). That is, when the power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing, the performance display editing processing, and the power failure monitoring are repeated. By enabling the interrupt (step X49) before the initial value random number updating process (step X50), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt process by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

In addition to the main process, the initial value random number updating process in step X50 includes a method of performing the initial value random number updating process in the timer interrupt process as well. In order to prevent the random number update process from being executed, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number update processing, which simplifies the main processing. The advantage is that

On the other hand, when a power failure has occurred (step X54; Y), a process of temporarily interrupting (step X55) and a process of outputting off data to all output ports (step X56) are performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X57), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X58). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X59) for calculating the checksum when the RWM is powered off and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step X60), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step X61). ), wait until the power of the gaming machine is cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before power shutdown is correctly backed up. It can be judged when re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game in general, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that performs various controls according to instructions from the main control means. ), and the main control means delays the start of the main control means when the power is turned on and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting the start of the slave control device (game control device 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring occurrence of power failure during the predetermined standby time.
In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100), RAM111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit has been operated. It is provided with an initialization unit (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the above, and the operation state of the initialization unit is read before the start of the standby time.
Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to permit access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine started at a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 11 is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step X101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing the register saving process of moving the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step X103) is performed.

Then, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting confirming flag is set (step X104), and when the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting confirming flag is set (step X104; Y). , Probability setting change/confirmation processing (step X122) is performed, and the timer interrupt processing ends.
On the other hand, when both the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting confirming flag are not set (step X104; N), the solenoids (special winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) are output based on the output data set in various processes. , An output process (step X105) for performing drive control of actuators such as the lever solenoid 38f and the universal solenoid 37c). When the firing stop signal is output in step X5 of the main process, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the launch permission state as seen from the game control device, and the second signal indicating the launch permission state seen from the payout control device (the launch permission signal) is also payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the firing control device. That is, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both of them are allowed to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step X106) of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer to the payout control device 200 in various processes, a random number update process 1 (step X107), and a random number update process 2 (step X108). After that, monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switches 38a and 39a, setting of a prize ball, front frame and glass A winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step X109) is performed to open the frame and monitor for errors such as illegal winning of the regular variable winning device 37 and the special variable winning devices 38, 39.

Next, it is determined whether abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110). Abnormal discharge means that in the first special variation winning device 38, the number of game balls discharged from the first special variation winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e) is It is to exceed the number of game balls (the number of game balls detected by the special winning opening switch 38a) flowing into the first special variation winning device 38. If abnormal discharge is occurring, the abnormal discharge flag is set. If abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process proceeds to step X116. That is, the game is prevented from proceeding.

On the other hand, when the abnormal discharge is not occurring (step X110; N), the starting port switch monitoring process (step X111) for monitoring the winning of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37. Then, the special figure 1 game processing (step X112) for performing the special figure 1 variable display game processing, the special figure 2 game processing (step X113) for performing the special figure 2 variable display game processing, and the general figure variable display game processing. A segment LED which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and which displays the special figure variation display game and various information relating to the game is driven so as to display desired contents by performing the universal figure game process (step X114). Edit processing (step X115) is performed.

Next, a magnet irregularity monitoring process (step X116) for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality, and a process for checking the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is any abnormality Illegal vibration monitoring process (step X117), which checks the detection signal from the vibration sensor 65 to determine whether there is any abnormality, and whether there is any abnormal discharge. The abnormal discharge monitoring process (step X119) is performed. Further, an external information editing process (step X120) of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer and a performance display monitor control process (step X121) regarding control of the performance display monitor 153 are performed, and the timer interrupt process is ended. To do.

Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are performed by interrupt return. At this time (at the end of timer interrupt processing), it is automatically performed. Depending on the CPU to be used, there is also a gaming machine in which it is necessary to instruct execution of a process of restoring the interrupt prohibited state or a process of restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
FIG. 12 shows the probability setting change/confirmation process (step X122) in the above timer interrupt process. In this probability setting change/confirmation processing, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is within the normal range (the range of 0 to 5 in this embodiment) (step X131).
If the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is within the normal range (step X131; Y), the probability setting corresponding to the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM (current probability setting value) The value display data is set (step X132), and the probability setting value display data is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X134). As a result, the performance display device 153 displays as shown in FIGS. 13(a) to 13(f).
On the other hand, when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is not within the normal range (step X131; N), the extinction data is set as the probability setting value display data (step X133), and the probability setting value display is performed. The data is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X134). As a result, the performance display device 153 displays as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 13, the performance display device 153 includes four 7-segment display devices (7-segment type display devices) arranged side by side. In the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the rightmost 7-segment display of these four 7-segment displays indicates the current probability setting value, and the remaining 7-segment display displays “SET”. “” is indicated.
Specifically, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is “0”, the current probability setting value is “setting 1”, and as shown in FIG. When “1” is displayed on the segment indicator and the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is “1”, the current probability setting value is “setting 2”, and therefore, in FIG. As shown, “7” is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display, and when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is “2”, the current probability setting value is “setting 3”, As shown in FIG. 13C, when “3” is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display and the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is “3”, the current probability setting value is “set”. Since it is 4", "4" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 13D, and when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is "4", the current value is "4". Since the probability setting value is “setting 5”, “5” is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 13E, and the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is “5”. If it is, the current probability setting value is “setting 6”, so that “6” is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. When the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is outside the normal range (abnormal value), the rightmost 7-segment display is turned off as shown in FIG. 13(g).
For example, when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is “0”, the probability setting value display data is “1” in the first digit, “T” in the second digit, and “T” in the third digit. Probability setting value display data for instructing to display “E” and “S” at the fourth digit is output to the fifth driver 138e.

Next, if the security signal control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step X135). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set in step X31 of the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0".
Then, the ON data of the security signal is output and the OFF data of the signals other than the security signal are output (step X136). In step X136, ON data of the security signal is output regardless of whether or not the security signal control timer is up. Therefore, the security signal is continuously output during the probability setting value changing mode and the probability setting value confirming mode (while the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting confirming flag are set).

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137), and when the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X137; N), that is, when the probability setting confirming flag is set. Ends the probability setting change/confirmation process. On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137; Y), the probability setting changing/confirming process being executed is the probability setting changing/checking in the first timer interrupt process after the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. It is determined whether it is a confirmation process (step X138).

If it is the probability setting change/confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (step X138; Y), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not the probability setting change/confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (step X138; N), it is determined whether there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139). In step X139, when an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is detected in the immediately preceding input processing (step X103), it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112. If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; N), the probability setting change/confirmation processing ends.

On the other hand, when there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; Y), that is, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is newly operated, the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is set to 0. +1 is updated in the range of 5 (step X140), and the probability setting change/confirmation processing is ended. The value updated in step X140 (updated probability setting value) is displayed on the performance display device 153 by the next probability setting change/confirmation process.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, “setting 1” to “setting 6” for three types of probability values (probability value in low probability state and probability value in high probability state). However, for example, “setting 1” to “setting 3” may be assigned to three types of probability values (probability value in low probability state and probability value in high probability state). In this case, in step X140, the value of the area for the probability setting value of RWM is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 2.

By operating the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, it is possible to shift to the probability setting value change mode, and the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated during the probability setting value change mode. You can change the probability setting value with.
Since the RAM initialization switch 112 can only be pressed, it is impossible to distinguish between a transition operation for transitioning to the probability setting value changing mode and a changing operation for changing the probability setting value. Therefore, when the transition operation (the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that has caused the transition to the probability setting value change mode) continues during the probability setting value change mode, that is, when the power is turned on. When 112 is kept pressed, the probability setting value is updated (changed) according to the operation, even though the operation is the transition operation.

Specifically, in the input process (step X103) of the timer interrupt process, the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the previous input process is the OFF state, and the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the current input process is When the state is the ON state, the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is detected. In the input processing (step X103) in the first timer interrupt processing after the power is turned on, the input processing immediately before the power is turned off is the previous input processing, and the input processing immediately after the power is turned on is the current input processing. It is highly possible that the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the processing is off. That is, when the transition operation is continued even in the probability setting value change mode, the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 in the input processing (step X103) in the first timer interrupt processing after the power is turned on. ) Is likely to be detected. Therefore, in this case, when the processing of steps X139 and 140 is performed in the probability setting change/confirmation processing in the first timer interrupt processing after the power is turned on, it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 based on the transfer operation, There is a possibility that the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is updated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to avoid such an inconvenience, the processing of step X138 is performed, and the processing of steps X139 and X140 is not performed in the probability setting change/confirmation processing in the first timer interrupt processing after the power is turned on. I will. As a result, for updating (changing) the probability setting value, the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that has been continued since the power was turned on (that is, the RAM initialization switch 112 that caused the transition to the probability setting value change mode). Since the input signal (rising edge) based on (operation of) is ignored, it is possible to prevent unintended update.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is the first gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a special result. An operation unit (setting key operation unit), a second operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112), and a storage unit that stores one probability setting value among a plurality of probability setting values to which a probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned. (Game control device 100 (RAM 111C)) and a mode in which the probability setting value is changed to a probability setting value changing mode in response to the operation of the first operation unit and the second operation unit when the game machine is powered on. In response to the operation of the transition means (game control device 100) and the second operation unit in the probability setting value changing mode, the probability setting value stored in the storage means (the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM). ) Change setting means (game control device 100), and the operation of the second operation unit to shift to the probability set value change mode (shift operation), and the second to change the probability set value The operation (change operation) of the operation unit is the same operation (press operation in the case of the present embodiment), and the setting change means continues from the power-on of the gaming machine even in the probability set value change mode. It is configured so as not to respond to the operation of the operating second operation unit.
Therefore, if the operation (transition operation) of the second operation unit that is performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on continues even after shifting to the probability setting value changing mode, the probability setting value is not changed during that time, which is not intended It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed.

[Starting switch monitoring process]
FIG. 14 shows the starting port switch monitoring process (step X111) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process. In this starting opening switch monitoring processing, first, the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) winning award monitoring table is prepared (step X491), and the hard random number acquisition processing (step X492) is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not there is the information regarding the winning of the starting mouth set when the jackpot random number is acquired based on the winning of the starting winning hole 36 in the hard random number acquisition processing (step X493).

When the information regarding the existence of the starting opening winning combination is not set based on the winning of the starting winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. It should be noted that in this case, the information regarding no starting opening winning a prize is set.
On the other hand, when the information regarding the winning of the starting opening is set based on the winning of the starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure low probability & no time saving (in the normal gaming state). (Step X494). If the special figure low probability & time saving is not in progress (step X494; Y), the process proceeds to step X497. If the special figure low probability and time saving are not in progress (step X494; N), a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step X495), and effect command setting processing (step X496) is performed.

Based on the reception of the right-handing instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 gives a right-handing instruction notification for instructing the player to make a right-handed stroke by display or voice. When the player is in the specific game state or the special game state, it is more advantageous for the player to hit the right hand, and the player does not win unless the player hits the left hand. The starting winning opening 36 is in the special game state or the special game state. When a winning is detected, the right-handing instruction is informed.

Then, a table for setting information on the hold by the starting opening 1 is prepared (step X497), and the special figure starting opening switch common processing (step X498) is performed. Next, the start opening 2 (ordinary variation winning device 37) winning award monitoring table is prepared (step X499), a hard random number acquisition process (step X500) is performed, and a jackpot random number is obtained based on the winning of the ordinary variation winning device 37. It is determined whether or not there is the information regarding the winning of the starting mouth set in this case (step X501).

When the information regarding the presence of the starting opening winning combination is not set based on the winning of the normal variation winning device 37 (step X501; N), the starting opening switch monitoring processing is ended. It should be noted that in this case, the information regarding no starting opening winning a prize is set.
On the other hand, when the information with the starting mouth winning is set based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 (step X501; Y), whether the electric power (normal variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, the normal It is determined whether or not the variable winning device 37 is operated and the gaming ball is in the open state in which the player can win the prize (step X502). Transition. On the other hand, when the general electric power is not operating (step X502; N), it is determined whether the general electric power is illegal (step X503).

In the determination as to whether or not the regular electric fraud has occurred, it is determined that the fraud has occurred if the number of illegally awarded prizes for the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variation winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if the game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball that won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the fraudulent winning number. When the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or larger than the predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

When the illegal power generation is occurring (step X503; Y), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second starting memory is not generated any more. In addition, when the illegal power transmission is not occurring (step X503; N), a table for setting information on the hold by the starting opening 2 is prepared (step X504), and the special figure starting opening switch common processing (step X505) is performed. Then, the starting port switch monitoring process is ended.

[Common processing for special figure start switch]
FIG. 15 shows the special figure starting port switch common process (steps X498, X505) in the starting port switch monitoring process described above. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process commonly performed for each input when the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are input.

In this special figure starting port switch common processing, first, information regarding the number of winnings to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is provided to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The output number of the starting port signal, which is the number of times of output, is loaded (step X521), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522), and it is determined whether the output number overflows (step X523).
If the number of outputs does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the starting port signal output number area of the RWM (step X524), and the special figure holding (starting) corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored (starting) is performed. It is determined whether or not the number of stored), that is, the number of special figure suspension (starting storage) to be updated is less than the upper limit value (here, 4) (step X525). On the other hand, when the output count overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of output times can be stored up to 255, but if the upper limit is stored, the value is not saved because the value is updated to +1 and loops to 0.

Then, if the number of reserved special figure to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step X525; N), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends. On the other hand, when the number of reserved special maps to be updated is less than the upper limit value (step X525; Y), the number of reserved special maps to be updated (the number of reserved special maps 1 or the number of reserved special maps 2) is updated by +1. (Step X526), the target starting opening winning flag is saved (Step X527). Next, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting port switch and the special figure holding number to be monitored is calculated (step X528), and the jackpot random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition processing is saved in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM. (Step X529).

After that, the big hit symbol random number of the starting mouth switch of the supervisory object is extracted and prepared (step X530), and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). Next, the falling lottery random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X532), and saved in the falling lottery random number storage area of the RWM (step X533).
Next, it is determined whether or not the winning is to the starting opening 2 (normal variation winning device 37) (step X534), and when the winning is not to the starting opening 2 (step X534; N), the process proceeds to step X537. On the other hand, in the case of winning the start opening 2 (step X534; Y), a small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X535), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X536). ..

Then, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step X537), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step X538) that is the prefetching process is performed. Next, a starter switch to be monitored and a decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure reservation number are prepared (step X539), and the effect command setting process (step X540) is performed to perform the special figure starting port common process. finish.
That is, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball into the start winning opening 36, and the predetermined random number can be stored as a first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number. It is a starting memory means. Further, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37, and the predetermined random number can be stored as a second starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit number. 2 Makes a starting memory.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
16 and 17 show the special figure holding information determination process (step X538) in the above-mentioned special figure starting port switch common process. The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetch process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In this special figure reservation information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not it is during a big hit (during the first special game state) (step X541), and if it is during a big hit (step X541; Y), the special figure hold information determination. The process ends. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step X541; N), the start opening winning flag saved in step X527 of the special drawing start opening switch common processing is checked to win the opening 1 (start winning opening 36). Is determined (step X542).

In the case of winning the start opening 1 (step X542; Y), the process proceeds to step X544 and prefetching is performed. On the other hand, if the winning is not in the starting opening 1 (step X542; N), it is determined whether or not there is a special figure low probability & no time saving (in a normal game state) (step X543). Then, when the special map low probability & time saving is not in progress (step X543; Y), the special map pending information determination processing is ended. That is, in the normal game state, long variation is selected as a variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game, which has a very long variation time (about 10 minutes), but in this case, prefetching is not performed. On the other hand, when it is not during the special figure low probability & no time saving (step X543; N), it is determined whether the special figure high probability is in progress (step X544).

When it is not in the special figure high probability (step X544; N), the process proceeds to step X548. On the other hand, when the special figure high probability is in progress (step X544; Y), is the value of the falling lottery random number prepared in step X532 of the special drawing starting port switch common processing within the range of the judgment value of the falling win? The determination is made (step X545). Next, the look-ahead falling lottery information command corresponding to the determination result is prepared (step X546), the effect command setting process (step X547) is performed, and the low probability determination flag is prepared (step X548).

Then, a pre-reading big hit judging process (step X549) for judging whether or not it is a big hit is carried out by whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit judgment value (big hit low probability judgment value). When the determination result is a big hit (step X550; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch is set (step X551), and prepared at step X530 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The stop symbol information corresponding to the hit big hit symbol random number is acquired (step X552), and the process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step X550; N), the starting opening winning flag saved in step X527 of the special drawing starting opening switch common processing is checked, and the starting opening 2 (normal variation winning device 37) It is determined whether or not there is a prize (step X553).

When it is not a winning in the starting opening 2 (step X553; N), the stop symbol information of the outset is set (step X558), and the process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, in the case of a win to the starting opening 2 (step X553; Y), a small hit determination process (step X554) for determining whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value. I do. Then, when the determination result is a small hit (step X555; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step X556), and the small hit symbol prepared in step X535 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step X557), and the process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, if the determination result is not a small hit (step X555; N), the stop symbol information of the outset is set (step X558), and the stop symbol information acquired in step X552 or X557 or set in step X558. The stopped symbol information is saved in the symbol information area (step X559).

Then, the read-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step X560), and the effect command setting process (step X561) is performed.
Next, the high-probability determination flag is prepared (step X562), and the pre-reading big-hit determination process (step X563) for determining whether or not the big-hit random number value matches the big-hit judgment value (big-hit high probability judgment value). I do. When the determination result is a big hit (step X564; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting mouth switch is set (step X565), and the special figure starting mouth switch common processing is performed at step X530. The stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number prepared in advance is acquired (step X566), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step X564; N), the starting opening winning flag saved in step X527 of the special drawing starting opening switch common processing is checked, and the starting opening 2 (normal variation winning device 37) It is determined whether or not there is a prize (step X567).

If it is not a winning in the starting opening 2 (step X567; N), the stop symbol information of the out is set (step X572), the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, in the case of winning the start opening 2 (step X567; Y), a small hit determination process (step X568) for determining whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value. I do. Then, if the determination result is a small hit (step X569; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step X570), and the small hit symbol prepared in step X535 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step X571), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a small hit (step X569; N), the stop symbol information of the outlier is set (step X572), and it is determined whether the special figure high probability is in progress (step X573).

If it is not within the special figure high probability (step X573; N), the process proceeds to step X575. On the other hand, if the special symbol is in high probability (step X573; Y), in the symbol information area in which the stopped symbol information is saved in step X559, the stopped symbol information acquired in step X566 or X571, or in step X572. The stop symbol information set by the above is overwritten and saved (step X574). The stop symbol information saved in the symbol information area is used for prefetching the variation pattern.

Next, a read-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target starting mouth switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step X575), and effect command setting processing (step X576) is performed. As described above, in this embodiment, every time the special figure holding information determination process is executed, the result determined by the big hit low probability determination value and the result determined by the big hit high probability determination value are transmitted to the effect control device 300. To be done.
Next, a special figure information setting process (step X577) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game (step X578). I do.
Then, the look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number indicating the variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step X579), and the effect command setting process (step X580) is performed to determine the special figure hold information. The process ends. The special figure information setting process in step X577 and the variation pattern setting process in step X578 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

By the above process, the prefetch fall lottery information command including the lottery result of the fall lottery for the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the prefetch target, and the prefetch stop including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the prefetch target A look-ahead variation pattern command including the symbol command and variation pattern information in the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, whether or not the result related information corresponding to the starting memory (whether it falls (whether the probability state of big hit shifts from a high probability state to a low probability state (normal probability state)), whether it is a big hit or a small hit) , The type of variation pattern) (prefetch result) can be notified to the effect control device 300 before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory, and is particularly displayed on the display device 41. It is possible to notify the player of the result-related information before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the displayed decoration special figure starting memory display.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that can determine the result of the variable display game and the variation mode information before the start of the variable display game, based on the startup memory stored in the startup storage unit. In addition, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start storage means before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, determines whether or not a special result is obtained). Make a preliminary judgment. Note that the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance not only at the time of the winning prize when the starting memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is performed. Good.

[Pre-reading big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 18 shows the prefetching big hit determination processing (steps X549 and X563) in the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination processing. In this pre-reading big hit judgment processing, first, the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value is set (step X581), and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step X582). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step X582; Y), that is, when it is not the big hit, deviation is set as the judgment result (step X587), and the pre-reading big hit judgment processing is ended. It should be noted that the deviation as the determination result means that the big hit lottery has been missed.
On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step X582; N), it is judged whether the judgment flag is the high probability judgment flag (step X583). When the determination flag is the high probability determination flag (step X583; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step X584), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is larger than the determination value (step X586). On the other hand, when the determination flag is not the high probability determination flag (step X583; N), that is, when it is the low probability determination flag, the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step X585). ), it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X586).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step X586; Y), that is, when it is not the big hit, deviation is set as the judgment result (step X587), and the prefetching big hit judgment processing is ended. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step X586; N), that is, when it is a big hit, the big hit is set as the judgment result (step X588), and the prefetch big hit judgment processing is ended.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
FIG. 19 shows the special figure 1 game process (step X112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process. In the special figure 1 game process, control of the entire process relating to the special figure 1 variable display game and setting of the display of special figure 1 are performed. In the special figure 1 game process, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 interruption flag which is set when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted is set (step Y100). In the special figure 1 variable display game, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the second special result (small hit) during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, the second special game state is executed. , Is interrupted during execution of the second special game state.

If the special figure 1 interruption flag is not set (step Y100; N), that is, if the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted, the process moves to step Y101 and subsequent special figure 1 variable display. Performs processing related to the game. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 interruption flag is set (step Y100; Y), that is, if the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the processing relating to the special figure 1 variable display game in steps Y101 to Y115 is performed. No, the process proceeds to step Y116. As a result, during the suspension of the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

In the process relating to the special figure 1 variable display game, first, a special game state executed based on whether the big hit/small hit of the special figure 2 is in progress, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit or a small hit. It is determined whether it is in progress (step Y101). Then, in the case of the big hit/small hit in the special figure 2 (step Y101; Y), the process proceeds to step Y104. On the other hand, when it is not in the big hit/small hit of special figure 2 (step Y101; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y102) is performed, and the specific region switch monitoring process (step Y103) is performed.

In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game balls are detected by the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39. Processing for monitoring and setting a special winning opening count command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the winning of the special winning opening, and for closing the special winning opening when a predetermined number of winnings are received in the special winning opening Process. In the special figure 1 game process, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit, and the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. For the special game state that is executed based on a big hit or a small hit, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special FIG. 2 game process described later.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball is monitored by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variation winning device 38, and is specified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (stochastic operation area). The process of setting the area passing flag is performed. Processing for generating a special game state is performed based on the fact that the specific area passage flag is set.

Next, if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y104), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y105). When the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y105; N), that is, when the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step Y116. If the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y105; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the process branches to the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to for this purpose is set in a register (step Y106). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is obtained using the table (step Y107), and the subroutine call by the special figure 1 game process number is performed (step Y108).

If the special figure 1 game process number is "0" in step Y108, the change start of the special figure 1 variable display game is monitored, and the change start setting and effect setting of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special effect are performed. Fig. 1 Special figure 1 normal process (step Y109) for setting information necessary for performing the changing process is performed.
When the special figure 1 game process number is "1" in step Y108, the special figure for setting the stop display time of special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 displaying process are specified. 1 The changing process (step Y110) is performed.
In step Y108, if the special figure 1 game process number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, setting of fanfare commands according to the kind of big hit, and each big hit type A special figure 1 displaying process (step Y111) for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern and the information necessary for performing the fanfare/interval processing is performed.

In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game process number is "3", setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, update of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, etc. Perform the fanfare/interval processing (step Y112).
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game process number is "4", the interval command is set if the big hit round is not the final round, while the ending command is set if it is the final round, and the special winning opening The special winning opening opening process (step Y113) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

When the special figure 1 game process number is "5" at step Y108, the process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening if the big hit round is the final round, and the special figure 1 The special winning opening remaining ball process (step Y114) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit ending process is performed.
If the special figure 1 game process number is "6" in step Y108, the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y115) that sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal process (step Y109) I do.

After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is prepared (step Y116), the symbol fluctuation control processing (step Y117) concerning the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed, and the lever solenoid The lever solenoid control process (step Y118) for controlling the operation of 38f is performed, and the special figure 1 game process is ended. The special figure 1 game process is a process of performing a series of execution controls regarding the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special Figure 2 game processing]
20 and 21 show the special figure 2 game process (step X113) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process. In the special figure 2 game process, control of the entire process relating to the special figure 2 variable display game and setting of the display of the special figure 2 are performed. The special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the special figure 1 game process described above for the special figure 2.

In the special figure 2 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the big figure of the special figure 1 is in the midst of a special game state, that is, the special game state is executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit (step). Y131). Then, when the big hit of special figure 1 is in progress (step Y131; Y), the process proceeds to step Y134. If the big hit of special figure 1 is not in progress (step Y131; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y132) is performed, and the specific region switch monitoring process (step Y133) is performed.

In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game balls are detected by the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39. Processing for monitoring and setting a special winning opening count command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the winning of the special winning opening, and for closing the special winning opening when a predetermined number of winnings are received in the special winning opening Process. In the special figure 2 game process, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit, and the special figure 1 variable display is performed. For the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball is monitored by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variation winning device 38, and is specified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (stochastic operation area). The process of setting the area passing flag is performed. Processing for generating a special game state is performed based on the fact that the specific area passage flag is set.

Next, if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y134), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135). When the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), that is, when the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step Y153. When the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0. It is determined whether or not (step Y136).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y136; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y137), and the special figure 2 game processing timer area is extended. The fluctuation timer value (for example, 60000 msec) is saved (step Y138), and the process proceeds to step Y153.
In order to prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variable display game with a high probability of a small hit in the normal game state, the change time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state is a very long time. (For example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the variable time at once even if the upper limit value is set as the timer initial value. Therefore, the variable time is measured by a plurality of times using the number of times of repetition, which is the number of times of measuring the specified time (for example, 60000 msec).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y136; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is registered in a register. It is set (step Y139). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is obtained using the table (step Y140), and the subroutine call by the special figure 2 game process number is performed (step Y141).

In step Y141, if the special figure 2 game process number is “0”, the change start of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the change start setting and effect setting of the special figure 2 variable display game FIG. 2 Special figure 2 normal processing (step Y142) for setting the information necessary for performing the changing process is performed.
If the special figure 2 game process number is "1" in step Y141, the special figure for setting the stop display time of special figure 2 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 displaying process, etc. 2 The changing process (step Y143) is performed.
In step Y141, if the special figure 2 game process number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, setting of fanfare commands according to the kind of big hit, and each big hit type The special figure 2 displaying process (step Y144) for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern and the information necessary for performing the fanfare/interval processing is performed.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game process number is "3", setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the special winning opening, etc. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step Y145).
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game process number is "4", the interval command is set if the big hit round is not the final round, while the ending command is set if it is the final round, and the special winning opening A special winning opening opening process (step Y146) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

At step Y141, if the special figure 2 game process number is "5", the process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening if the big hit round is the final round, and the special figure 2 The special winning opening remaining ball process (step Y147) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit ending process is performed.
If the special figure 2 game process number is "6" in step Y141, the special figure 2 jackpot end process (step Y148) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal process (step Y108) I do.

In step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command setting, and the processing during the small hit are performed. The small hit fanfare middle processing (step Y149) for setting the information necessary for the above is performed.
When the special figure 2 game process number is "8" at step Y141, a small hit mid-range process (step Y150) for setting an ending command and information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process is performed. To do.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game process number is "9", a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls won in the special winning opening during the small hit medium process, and the small hit end The small hit remaining ball process (step Y151) is performed to set the information necessary for the process.
If the special figure 2 game process number is "10" in step Y141, the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y152) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal process is performed.

After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuations of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (step Y153), and symbol fluctuation control processing (step Y154) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed, and the lever solenoid The lever solenoid control process (step Y155) for controlling the operation of 38f is performed, and the special figure 2 game process is ended. The special figure 2 game process is a process of performing a series of execution controls regarding the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The above-mentioned special figure 2 game process is basically the same as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process for the special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. The corresponding processing will be described in parallel.

[Special processing 1 usual processing]
FIG. 22 shows the special figure 1 normal process (step Y109) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 normal process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start changing (step Y201). The state in which it is possible to start variation in the special figure 1 in this determination is not from the variation stop of the special figure 2 variation display game in which the big hit or the small hit occurs until the end of the special game state. It should be noted that the fluctuation cannot be started even during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game or during the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game, but in that case, the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. However, it is not necessary to judge this here.

When the special figure 1 cannot start changing (step Y201; N), "0" is set as the special figure 1 game process number (step Y216), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area. (Step Y217), normal processing of special figure 1 ends. In addition, when the special map 1 can start changing (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handing instruction notification has been completed, that is, whether the left-handing instruction notification flag is set (step Y202).
When the left-handing instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. If the left-handing instruction notification has not been made (step Y202; N), a left-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), effect command setting processing (step Y204) is performed, and a left-handing instruction notification flag is set. Yes (step Y205). The left-handing instruction notification flag is set to be cleared when the specific game state ends, whereby the left-handing instruction notification is performed when the game state shifts to the normal game state.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 reserved number is 0 (step Y206). When the special figure 1 reserved number is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. In addition, when the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (step Y206; N), the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and the effect command setting process (step Y208) is performed. .. After that, the special figure 1 variation start processing (step Y209) for setting information on the special figure 1 variation display game and the like is performed, and a decorative special figure 1 pending number command corresponding to the special figure 1 pending number is prepared (step Y210). ) And effect command setting processing (step Y211). It should be noted that at the time of performing the process (step Y210) of preparing the decoration special figure reservation number command, the subtraction of the special figure 1 reservation number based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game is not performed, and the current special figure 1 reservation is held. The reserved number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number subtracted from the number is prepared. After that, the remaining game number command corresponding to the time shortening variation number is prepared (step Y212), and the effect command setting process (step Y213) is performed.

Next, the change of special figure 1 is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y214). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure variable display game, and any one of 0 to 5 is set. Special map status 0 indicates that neither the special map 1 variable display game nor the special map 2 variable display game is running, and the special map status 1 indicates that only the special map 1 variable display game is running. The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. In addition, the special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed, and the special figure status 4 is the first special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit. There is, and the special figure status 5 indicates that it is the second special game state which is the special game state based on the small hit. Since the special figure 1 variable display game is started here, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status. After that, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting processing (step Y215) is performed, and the special figure 1 normal processing ends.

[Special figure 2 daily processing]
FIG. 23 shows the special figure 2 normal process (step Y142) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 normal process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start changing (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 can start changing in this determination is not from the stop of the change in the special figure 1 changing display game which is a big hit until the end of the special game state. It should be noted that the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game, but in that case, the special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. However, it is not necessary to judge this here.

If the special figure 2 cannot start changing (step Y221; N), "0" is set as the special figure 2 game process number (step Y238), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area. (Step Y239), the special figure 2 normal processing is ended. Further, when the special map 2 can start changing (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 (step Y222).

Then, when the special figure 2 holding number is not 0 (step Y222; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and effect command setting processing (step Y224) is performed. .. After that, the special figure 2 variation start processing (step Y225) for setting information about the special figure 2 variable display game and the like is performed, and a decorative special figure 2 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared (step Y226. ) And effect command setting processing (step Y227). At the time of performing the process (step Y226) of preparing the decoration special figure reservation number command, the special figure 2 reservation number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the current special figure 2 reservation is held. The reserved number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved number subtracted from the number is prepared. After that, the remaining game number command corresponding to the time shortening variation number is prepared (step Y228), and the effect command setting process (step Y229) is performed.

Next, the change of special figure 2 is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y230). Since the special figure 2 variable display game is started here, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status. After that, special figure 2 mid-fluctuation process shift setting processing (step Y231) is performed, and the special figure 2 normal processing ends.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y232). Then, when the number of reserved special maps 1 is 0 (step Y232; Y), it is determined whether or not the special maps 1 are changing (step Y233). When the special map 1 is not changing (step Y233; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y234), and when it is not started (step Y234; N), the customer waiting is waited. Performs processing related to status setting. In addition, when the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (step Y232; N), when the special figure 1 is fluctuating (step Y233; Y) or when the customer waiting demonstration has started (step Y234; Y). Shifts to step Y238.

In the process for setting the customer waiting state, first, the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step Y235), and the customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y236), and the effect is produced. Command setting processing (step Y237) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y238. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it becomes possible to display different customer waiting screens depending on the probability state.

Further, when the production control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the production control device 300 without the backup function loses the information on the game state, so that it becomes impossible to perform an appropriate production. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state from the reception of this command, and the probability information command based on the change of the game state is transmitted. It will be possible to return to the production according to the game state faster than waiting.

Further, with the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, and the probability state may change due to the processing for the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, the variation start probability information command is transmitted every time the special figure variation display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). As a result, it becomes possible for the effect control device 300 to perform an appropriate effect according to the game state.

Further, by transmitting the variation start probability information command each time the special figure variation display game is started, even if the production control device 300 is restarted, the production according to the game state can be performed from the reception of this command. Therefore, it is possible to return to the effect according to the game state earlier than waiting for the probability information command based on the change of the game state to be transmitted. It should be noted that the customer waiting demo command and the variation start probability information command may include other information for allowing the production control device 300 to return to the production according to the game state when it is restarted.

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 24A shows the special figure 1 variation start process (step Y209) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 normal process. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game. In the special figure 1 variation start process, first, the special figure 1 information setting flag used for sorting the variation patterns in the special figure pending information determination process is set (step Y241). Next, a random number is loaded from the special figure 1 falling lottery random number storage area (for holding number 1) to prepare (step Y242), and the special drawing 1 falling lottery random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0. (Step Y243), a falling lottery process (step Y244) is performed to draw a transition from the high-probability state to the low-probability state. The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the earliest of the special figures 1).

Next, the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y245) for setting the deviation information or the big hit information as the result information of the special figure 1 variable display game is performed, and the special figure 1 stop relating to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) is stopped. A symbol setting process (step Y246) is performed. To perform special figure 1 information setting processing (step Y247) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern, and refer to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game. The special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which the information of (1) is set, is prepared (step Y248).

After that, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y249) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variable display game is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting information of fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variable display game The process (step Y250) is performed, and the time shortening variation number update process (step Y251) is performed. Next, as the process number, "1" relating to the process during fluctuation of special figure 1 is set (step Y252), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step Y253).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y254), and a signal related to the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y255). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y256), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is set in the special figure 1 blink control timer area ( Here, 100 msec) is saved (step Y257), the initial value (here, "0" indicating a blank symbol) is saved in the special figure 1 changing symbol number area (step Y258), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. To finish.

[Special map 2 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 24B shows the special figure 2 variation start process (step Y225) in the special figure 2 normal process described above. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game. In the special figure 2 variation start process, first, the special figure 2 information setting flag used for sorting the variation patterns in the special figure pending information determination process is set (step Y261). Next, a random number is loaded from the special figure 2 falling lottery random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step Y262), and the special drawing 2 falling lottery random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0. (Step Y263), a falling lottery process (step Y264) is performed to draw a transition from the high-probability state to the low-probability state. The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure starting storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2).

Next, the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y265) for setting the deviation information, the big hit information or the small hit information as the result information of the special figure 2 variable display game is performed, and the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) is set. Special figure 2 stop design setting processing (step Y266) is performed. Then, the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y267) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed to refer to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game. The special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which the information of (1) is set, is prepared (step Y268).

After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y269) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a variation mode in the special figure 2 variable display game is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 variable display game. The process (step Y270) is performed, and the time reduction fluctuation start update process (step Y271) is performed. Next, as the process number, "1" relating to the process during fluctuation of special figure 2 is set (step Y272), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step Y273).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y274), and a signal related to fluctuation start of special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y275). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 change control flag area (step Y276), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is set in the special figure 2 blink control timer area ( Here, 100 msec) is saved (step Y277), the initial value (here, "0" indicating a blank symbol) in the special figure 2 changing symbol number area is saved (step Y278), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process To finish.

In addition, when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start processing or special figure 2 variation start processing, the information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests or informs the probability setting value, such as selecting a variation pattern according to the probability setting value or changing the selection probability of the variation pattern according to the probability setting value.

[Falling lottery processing]
FIG. 25 shows the falling lottery processing (steps Y244 and Y264) performed in the special figure 1 variation start processing and the special figure 2 variation start processing. In this falling lottery process, first, it is determined whether the special figure high probability is in progress (step Y581), and when it is not in the special figure high probability (step Y581; N), the falling lottery process is ended. In addition, when the special figure high probability is in progress (step Y581; Y), it is determined whether the value of the target falling lottery random number is less than the falling lottery lower limit judgment value (step Y582). Winning the falling lottery means that the falling lottery random number matches the falling lottery determination value. The falling lottery judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the falling lottery random number is equal to or more than the lower limit value of the falling lottery judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the falling lottery judgment value, and the upper limit value of the falling lottery judgment value. When it is less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, it is judged that the player has won the falling lottery.

When the value of the falling lottery random number is less than the falling lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582; Y), that is, when the falling lottery is not won, the falling lottery process is ended. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, if the value of the falling lottery random number is not less than the falling lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582; N), it is determined whether the value of the target falling lottery random number is larger than the falling lottery upper limit determination value (step Y583).
When the value of the falling lottery random number is larger than the falling lottery upper limit determination value (step Y583; Y), that is, when the falling lottery is not won, the falling lottery process is ended. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the value of the falling lottery random number is not larger than the falling lottery upper limit determination value (step X583; N), that is, when the falling lottery is won, processing for shifting to a low probability state is performed.

In the process for shifting to the low probability state, first, a signal related to high probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). Here, the jackpot 2 signals are set to ON and the jackpot 4 signals are set to OFF. Next, the signal relating to the high probability & shortening of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is set to OFF.
Then, the signal relating to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y586), and the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step Y587). After that, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y588), and the falling lottery process is ended. As a result, a low probability state and a state where there is no ordinary electric power support is entered, and the game state shifts to the normal game state. Information about the end of the high probability state and the end of the universal communication support is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 performs processing such as changing the effect mode based on this information.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 26A shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y245) in the above-mentioned Toku-zu 1 variation start process. In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y281). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step Y282), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 ( Step Y283).

After that, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2 which is the result of the big hit judgment of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is a big hit (step Y284), and when it is a big hit (step Y284; Y), the big hit flag 1 is set. The process ends. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game which are executed at the same time are prevented from being a big hit. If the jackpot is not a jackpot (step Y284; N), a jackpot determination process (step Y285) is performed to determine whether or not the obtained jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y285) is a jackpot (step Y286; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area in which the deviation information was saved in step Y281 (step Y286). Y287), and ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y285) is not a big hit (step Y286; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process ends. In this case, the hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 26B shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y265) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 variation start process. In this big hit flag 2 setting processing, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step Y293), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 ( Step Y294).

Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 which is the result of the big hit judgment of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is a big hit (step Y295), and if it is a big hit (step Y295; Y), the process proceeds to step Y299. To do. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game which are executed at the same time are prevented from being a big hit. When the jackpot is not a jackpot (step Y295; N), a jackpot determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether or not the obtained jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.
Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is a jackpot (step Y297; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area in which the deviation information is saved in step Y292 (step Y297). Y298), and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process.

On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is not a jackpot (step Y297; N), it is determined whether or not the obtained jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value, which is a jackpot. A small hit determination process (step Y299) is performed.
When the result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 2 area in which the deviation information is saved in step Y291. Save (step Y301), and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not the small hit (step Y300; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process ends. In this case, the off information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit determination processing]
FIG. 27 shows the jackpot determination processing (steps Y285 and Y296) in the jackpot flag 1 setting processing and the jackpot flag 2 setting processing described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; Y), that is, when it is not the big hit, deviation is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. It should be noted that the deviation as the determination result means that the big hit lottery has been missed. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; N), it is judged whether or not there is a special figure high probability (step Y313).

When the special figure high probability is in progress (step Y313; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step Y314), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is larger than the determination value (step Y316). When the special figure high probability is not in progress (step Y313; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step Y315), and the value of the target jackpot random number is determined as the upper limit. It is determined whether the value is larger than the value (step Y316).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; Y), that is, when it is not the big hit, deviation is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; N), that is, when it is a big hit, the big hit is set as the judgment result (step Y318), and the big hit judgment processing is ended.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 28 shows the small hit determination process (step Y299) in the above-described big hit flag 2 setting process. In this small hit determination process, it is first determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). The small hit means that the big hit random number (the same random number as the big hit determination) matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and if the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Moreover, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value do not overlap.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; Y), that is, when it is not the small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y323), and the small hit determination process ends. In addition, the deviation as the determination result means that the lottery for the small hit has been missed. If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321; N), it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y322).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y322; Y), that is, when it is not the small hit, deviation is set as the judgment result (step Y323), and the small hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y322; N), that is, if it is the small hit, the small hit is set as the judgment result (step Y324), and the small hit judgment process is executed. finish.

[Special map 1 stop symbol setting process]
In FIG. 29, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y246) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process is shown. In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1 Jackpot random number from (for) (step Y332). Next, the special figure 1 big hit design table is set (step Y333), the stop design number which corresponds to the big hit design random number which is loaded is acquired, and it saves in the special figure 1 stop design save area (step Y334). By this processing, the jackpot type is selected. In addition, when the special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly changed to.

After that, the special figure 1 big hit stop design information table is set (step Y335), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special design 1 stop design pattern area (step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol indicator (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y337), and the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired to obtain the special figure 1 round number. Save in the upper limit value information area (step Y338), obtain the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number, save it in the special figure 1 special winning opening opening information area (step Y339), and move to step Y340. .. These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), the stop symbol number at the time of falling is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area (step Y344), and the deviation stop symbol pattern is set in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area. Save (step Y345). Next, a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared and saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y340). Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. After that, effect command setting processing (step Y341) is performed. Thereby, the decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the production control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y342), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y343), and the special symbol 1 Stop the symbol setting process.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
In FIG. 30, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y266) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 variation start process is shown. The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process for the special figure 2. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361), and if it is a big hit (step Y361; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1 Jackpot random number is loaded from (for use)) (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (step Y363), the stop design number which corresponds to the big hit design random number which is loaded is acquired, it saves in the special figure 2 stop design evacuation area (step Y364). By this processing, the jackpot type is selected. In addition, when the special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly changed to.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table is set (step Y365), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special design 2 stop design pattern area (step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol indicator (here, the special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y367), and the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired to obtain the special figure 2 round number. Save in the upper limit value information area (step Y368), obtain the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number, save it in the special figure 2 special winning opening opening information area (step Y369), and move to step Y370. .. These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y375), and if it is a small hit (step Y375; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number A small hit symbol random number is loaded from the storage area (for holding number 1) (step Y376). Next, the special figure 2 small hit symbol design table is set (step Y377), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y378). By this processing, the small hit type is selected. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y379), and the process proceeds to step Y370.

Further, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y375; N), the stop symbol number at the time of falling off is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol saving area (step Y380), and the off stop symbol pattern is specially drawn. 2 Save in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y381). Then, a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared and saved in the decoration special figure 2 command area (step Y370). Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. After that, the effect command setting process (step Y371) is performed. As a result, the decoration special figure 2 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y372), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y373), and the special figure 2 The small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y374), and the special figure 2 stopped symbol setting process is ended.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100, based on the first start-up memory stored in the first start-up storage means, the result and the change mode information of the first changeable display game (special figure 1 changeable display game), in the first changeable display game. Forms a first determining means that can be determined before the start of the. In addition, the game control device 100, based on the second starting memory stored in the second starting storage means, the result and the variation mode information of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game), based on the second variable display game. It constitutes a second determining means that can be determined before the start of. Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variable display game, based on the determination information stored in the starting memory.

From the above, the starting winning opening 36 is arranged at a position where the game ball shot to one side of the game area 32 can be won, and the normal variation winning device 37 is a game ball shot to the other side of the game area 32. Is arranged at a position where a prize can be won, and the variation mode information of the variable display game includes information on the variation time that can specify the execution time of the variable display game, and the second determination is made in the normal state (normal game state). The variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the second variation display game by the means is longer than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the first variation display game by the first determination means. Become.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Set the detailed effect contents in the decoration display variable display game. The information about the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information about the number of starting memories (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information about a stop pattern, and variation of the special figure variation display game. Examples include variable commands that include information about patterns. In addition, by transmitting the decoration special drawing command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

That is, the game control device 100 constitutes first variable display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the first variable display game from the entire special figure 1 game processing.
Further, the game control device 100 constitutes second variable display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the second variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the second variable display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game process.

In addition, the game control device 100 controls the result and variation mode information of the first variable display game determined by the first determining means, and the result and variation mode information of the second variable display game determined by the second determining means. As a transmission means capable of transmitting to the effect control means (effect control device 300). Further, when the game control device 100 starts measuring the variation time for each of the first variation display game and the second variation display game in response to the start of the variation display game, and when the measurement time has passed the variation time, It constitutes a measurement means for ending the measurement of the variation time of the variation display game.

In addition, in the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state, long fluctuation is set for which the fluctuation time is very long, but in this case, information about the fluctuation time is not transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the long fluctuation is set. It is also possible to send a command indicating only that. In the case of long fluctuation, it is sufficient to simply display the fluctuation, and it is not necessary to determine the effect in detail. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts the variable display based on the reception of the command of the long fluctuation. The variation time is managed only by the game control device 100, a stop command is transmitted to the production control device 300 when the variation time ends, and the production control device 300 stops the variation display based on the reception of the stop command. To do so. By doing so, the control load on the effect control device 300 can be reduced.

[Special map 1 information setting process]
FIG. 31 shows the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y247) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process. In the special figure 1 information setting process, first, the fluctuation pattern selection information table is set (step Y401), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern are acquired (step Y402). FIG. 1 jackpot, that is, whether the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is a jackpot stop symbol pattern (step Y403). When the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y403; Y), the process proceeds to step Y405.

If it is not the special figure 1 big hit (step Y403; N), the value is converted by adding the special figure 1 holding number to the first half offset data (step Y404). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y405). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. The variation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for allocating the first half variation (variation mode before the start of reach) and is used later for selecting a variation group.

After that, the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y405), and the special figure 1 information setting process ends. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. This variation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for allocating the latter half variation (reach type (including no reach)) and is used later for selecting a variation group.
As described above, in the special figure 1 variable display game, in the case of the deviation, only the first half variation pattern is determined in consideration of the special figure 1 hold number, and in the case of a big hit, the special figure 1 hold number is considered. Instead, the fluctuation pattern is determined.

[Special map 2 information setting process]
FIG. 32 shows the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y267) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 variation start process. In the special figure 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure low probability & no time saving (during normal game state) is in progress (step Y421). If it is not during the special figure low probability & no time saving (step Y421; N), it is determined whether or not it is a time shortening final variation (step Y427). Here, when the special figure 2 variation display game to be started from now is the special figure variation display game 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the time-reduction final variation.

Then, if it is the final reduction in time reduction (step Y427; Y), the process proceeds to step Y428. If it is not the time shortening final fluctuation (step Y427; N), the fluctuation pattern selection information table is set (step Y423), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern are acquired. (Step Y424) and the process proceeds to step Y425.

On the other hand, when the special figure low probability & no time saving is in progress (step Y421; Y), it is determined whether or not it is a high probability final fluctuation (step Y427). Here, when the falling lottery for the special figure 2 variable display game to be started is won, it is determined that the high probability final fluctuation.
If it is a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y427; Y), the first-half offset data and the second-half offset data for the final fluctuation are set (step Y428), and the process proceeds to step Y425.
If it is not the high-probability final change (step Y427; N), it is determined whether or not it is a special figure 2 big hit (step Y429). If it is not the special figure 2 big hit (step Y429; N), the first half offset data for low probability special figure 2 deviation/small hit is set (step Y430), and the latter half offset data for special figure 2 long variation is set. Is set (step Y432), and the process proceeds to step Y425.

In the case of special figure 2 big hit (step Y429; Y), the first half offset data for special figure 2 big hit at low probability is set (step Y431), and the latter half offset data for special figure 2 long fluctuation is set. Yes (step Y432). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y425). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. The variation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for allocating the first half variation (variation mode before the start of reach) and is used later for selecting a variation group.

After that, the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y426), and the special figure 2 information setting process ends. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. This variation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for allocating the latter half variation (reach type (including no reach)) and is used later for selecting a variation group.
As described above, in the special figure 2 variable display game, the variation pattern is determined without considering the special figure 2 hold number.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing]
FIG. 33 shows the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y249) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process. The variation patterns are the first half variation pattern that is a variation mode from the start of the special figure variation display game to the reach state and the second half variation that is the variation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure variation display game. The first half variation pattern is set after the latter half variation pattern is set first.

In this special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group address table is set (step Y451), the address of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y452), The fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of FIG. 1 (step Y453).
Next, it deviates from the special figure 1, that is, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol pattern is the discontinued stop symbol pattern (step Y454). )I do. If the special map 1 is not out of alignment (step Y454; N), a distribution process (step Y456) is performed.

In the present embodiment, the structure of the second-half variation group table is different between the hitting and the non-hit. Specifically, the hit type has a 1-byte size, and the loss type has a 2-byte size. Since the hit occurrence rate is lower than the outfall occurrence rate and one byte is sufficient, the hit size is 1 byte in size from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity. Therefore, at the time of winning, only the lower value of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 is used. Further, the occurrence rate of outliers is higher than the rate of occurrence of hits, and in order to enable more diverse effects, the outliers have a 2-byte size.

Then, the address of the latter half fluctuation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y457), and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of holding 1) of the special figure 1. And prepare (step Y458). Then, a distribution process (step Y459) is performed, and the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step Y460). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

Next, the first half variation group table is set (step Y461), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half variation number determined as the variation distribution information 1 (step Y462). Then, the address of the first half fluctuation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y463), and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of holding 1) of special figure 1. Prepare (step Y464).
After that, the distribution process (step Y465) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y466), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process ends. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 1 variation display game to be started is set.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 34 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y269) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group address table is set (step Y471), the address of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y472), The variable pattern random number 1 is loaded from the variable pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of holding 1) shown in FIG. 2 (step Y473).

Next, it deviates from the special figure 2, that is, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol pattern is the discontinued stop symbol pattern (step Y474). )I do. If the special map 2 is not out of alignment (step Y474; N), a distribution process (step Y476) is performed.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for reserved number 1) of FIG. To prepare (step Y478). Then, a distribution process (step Y479) is performed, and the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step Y480). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

Next, the first half variation group table is set (step Y481), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half variation number determined as the variation distribution information 1 (step Y482). Then, the address of the first-half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of holding 1) of special figure 2. Prepare (step Y484).
After that, the distribution process (step Y485) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y486), and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process ends. By this process, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 2 variation display game to be started is set.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 35 shows the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps Y250, Y270) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. In the fluctuation start information setting process, first, the random number storage areas (for the number of holding 1) of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are cleared (step Y551). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y552), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y553). Further, the second half variation time value table is set (step Y554), and the second half variation time value corresponding to the second half variation number is acquired (step Y555). Then, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step Y556), and the added value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area (step Y557).

In addition, in the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state, a long fluctuation is set with a very long fluctuation time. In this case, as the above-mentioned added value, the remaining time (time less than 60,000 msec) excluding the time that can be measured using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times of counting the specified time (here, 60,000 msec), is the added value. Is calculated as

After that, it is determined whether the information of special figure 1 is being set (step Y558). When the information of special figure 1 is being set (step Y558; Y), the process proceeds to step Y562. Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y558; N), that is, when the information of the special figure 2 is being set, it is determined whether or not the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 is started (step Y559). The long variation is a variation pattern set when the special display 2 variation display game is in the normal gaming state, and is determined by the number of the set variation pattern.

Then, if the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 is not started (step Y559; N), 0 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y560). When the long fluctuation of special figure 2 has started (step Y559; Y), 9 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y561).

After that, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step Y562), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step Y563), and the effect command setting process (step Y564) is performed. To do. Next, the target number of reservations is updated by -1 (step Y566), the content of the target random number storage area is shifted (step Y566), the empty area after the shift is cleared (step Y567), and fluctuation start information setting The process ends.

In the present embodiment, the number of repetitions is set in the long fluctuation of FIG. 2 in order to change the time that is insufficient with the 2-byte timer. In the variation start information setting process, the timer of 60000 msec and the number of repetitions of 9 are saved as the addition result, the timer is subtracted by the timer interrupt process, and when the time is up, the number of repetitions is decremented by 1 Set the second. As a result, the variation time of the long variation in the special figure 2 is 10 minutes (=60000 msec×10). Since the timer interrupt cycle is 4 ms, it can be set up to about 262 seconds with 2 bytes, but for ease of understanding, it is represented by multiplication of 60 seconds.

[Time reduction change count update process]
FIG. 36 shows the time-shortening fluctuation number update processing (steps Y251 and Y271) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. In this time shortening variation count updating process, first, it is determined whether the special figure high probability is in progress (high probability state) (step Y571). If the special figure high probability is in progress (step Y571; Y), the time is changed. The shortened variation count updating process ends. If it is not in the special figure high probability (step Y571; N), it is determined whether the special figure is being shortened (step Y572). If it is not during the special drawing time saving (step Y572; N), the time shortening variation number updating process is ended. If the special drawing time saving is in progress (step Y572; Y), the number of times of time shortening fluctuation is updated by -1 (step Y573), and it is determined whether the number of times of time shortening fluctuation becomes "0" (step Y574). ..

When the number of times of time shortening fluctuation is not "0" (step A754; N), the processing of updating the number of times of time shortening fluctuation is ended. Further, when the number of time shortening fluctuations becomes “0” (step Y574; Y), a signal related to time saving end (for example, two big hit signals are turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y575). , A signal related to the end of the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, the normal symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, the normal electric auditors 1 opening extension The state signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y576).
Next, the number in the low probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y577), the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y578), and the general figure game mode flag area Then, the normal time saving flag is saved (step Y579), and the time shortening variation count updating process ends.

[Special figure 1 processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y110) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times of symbol determination output is updated by +1 (step Y621). Then, commands are loaded from the decoration special figure 1 command area to prepare (step Y622), and effect command setting processing (step Y623) is performed.

Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and effect command setting processing (step Y625) is performed. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there is a case where it is forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of fluctuation, so when stopping fluctuation, a stop command is transmitted to the performance control device 300. .. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y626). In the present embodiment, for example, the display time is set to 600 msec in the case of a loss and 2000 msec in the case of a big hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of alignment (step Y627). If the special figure 1 is out of alignment (step Y627; Y), the process proceeds to step Y642. If the special figure 1 is not out of alignment (step Y627; N), that is, if it is a big hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y628). Whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

If the special figure 2 variable display game is not being executed (step Y628; Y), the process proceeds to step Y639. Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y628; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 displaying process is being performed (step Y629). That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, and the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is forcibly stopped as a result. In addition, even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already finished variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

When the processing is in process of displaying the special figure 2 (step Y639; Y), the process proceeds to step Y631. Further, when the special figure 2 is not being displayed (step Y629; N), the number of times the symbol determination number is output is updated by +1 (step Y630), and the special figure 1 set as the display time of the special figure 2 is changed. The display time + display time of 4 msec is set (step Y631). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of 4 msec as the display time of the special figure 2, the display times of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 will end at the same time. Even when the special figure 2 variable display game is already in display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started. By this resetting, the stop display time is extended, but it may be shortened in some cases.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y632), and the decorative special figure 2 deviation design command is set and prepared (step Y633). Then, the design command is saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y634), and effect command setting processing (step Y635) is performed. After that, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y636), effect command setting processing (step Y638) is performed, and special figure 2 display processing transition setting processing 2 (step Y638) is performed.

Then, the command is loaded from the decoration special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y639), and the information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area and saved in the round number upper limit value information area. (Step Y640), information is loaded from the special prize 1 special winning opening opening information area and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (step Y641). After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y642), and the special figure 1 display processing transition setting process 1 (step Y643) is performed, and the special figure 1 The displayed process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 38 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y143) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In the special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times of symbol determination output is updated by +1 (step Y651). Then, commands are loaded from the decoration special figure 2 command area to prepare (step Y652), and effect command setting processing (step Y653) is performed.

Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and effect command setting processing (step Y655) is performed. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y656). In the present embodiment, for example, the display time is set to 600 msec in the case of off, 600 msec in the case of big hit, and 136 msec in the case of small hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of alignment (step Y657). When the special figure 2 is out of alignment (step Y657; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. If the special figure 2 is not shifted (step Y657; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y658). Whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

If the special figure 1 variable display game is not being executed (step Y658; N), the process proceeds to step Y673. When the special figure 1 variable display game is running (step Y658; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (step Y659). ). If the special figure 2 big hit is not (step Y659; N), that is, if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (step Y670), and the decoration special figure 1 is interrupted. A command is prepared (step Y671), effect command setting processing (step Y672) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y673.

That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is interrupted based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. It should be noted that even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already completed variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to interruption. The suspended special figure 1 variable display game is restarted at the end of the special game state (second special game state) based on the small hit (second special result).

On the other hand, if the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y659; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is being displayed (step Y660). That is, in this case, the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is forcibly stopped due to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit. It should be noted that even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already finished variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it will be subject to forced stop.

When the processing is in process of displaying the special figure 1 (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y662. If the special figure 1 is not being displayed (step Y660; N), the number of times the symbol determination number is output is updated by +1 (step Y661), and the special figure 2 of the special figure 2 is set as the display time. The display time + display time of 4 msec is set (step Y662). By setting the display time of the special figure 2 + the display time of 4 msec as the display time of the special figure 1, the display times of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 end at the same time. Even when the special figure 1 variable display game is already in display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started. By this resetting, the stop display time is extended, but it may be shortened in some cases.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y663), and the decorative special figure 1 deviation pattern command is set and prepared (step Y664). Then, the design command is saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y665), and effect command setting processing (step Y666) is performed. Then, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), effect command setting processing (step Y668) is performed, and special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2 (step Y669) is performed.

Then, the command is loaded from the decoration special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y673), and whether it is a special figure 2 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. The determination is made (step Y674). If it is a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. If it is not a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step (Y675), information is loaded from the special prize 2 special winning opening opening information area and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (step Y676). After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y677), and the special figure 2 display processing transition setting process 1 (step Y678) is performed, and the special figure 2 The displayed process is terminated.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
FIG. 39 shows the special figure 1 displaying process (step Y111) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 displaying process, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area by the big hit flag 1 setting processing in the special figure 1 variation start processing is loaded (step Y751), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared. (Step Y752). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is big hit information (step Y753). The test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the special symbol 1 signal is ON) regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y754).

Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop design pattern is loaded from the hit design command area and prepared (step Y755), and effect command setting processing (step Y756) is performed. After that, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y757), and effect command setting processing (step Y758) is performed.
Next, the special winning opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a big hit in the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y759). In the case of the present embodiment, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as the signals corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability. Each ON/OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability.

After that, a big hit fanfare time (for example, 100 msec) corresponding to the big winning opening information is set (step Y760), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y761). Next, 3 is set as the process number (step Y762), and the game number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y763). Further, a fanfare/inter-interval process shift setting process (step Y764) is performed, and the process of displaying special figure 1 is terminated.

On the other hand, if Toku-zu 1 is not a big hit (step Y753; N), that is, if the big hit flag 1 is off information, it is determined whether it is a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y765), and if it is not a high-probability final fluctuation ( In step Y765; N), it is determined whether or not it is the time reduction final variation (step Y766). Here, when the falling lottery for the running special figure 1 variation display game is won, it is determined that the high probability final variation. Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is the special figure variable display game 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the time reduction final fluctuation.

Then, when it is not the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y765; N) and when it is not the time shortening final fluctuation (step Y766; N), the process proceeds to step Y774. If it is a high-probability final change (step Y765; Y) or if it is a time-shortening final change (step Y766; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y767), and the effect command is generated. A setting process (step Y768) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y769), the left-handing instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y770), and whether the small hit of special figure 2 is in progress, that is, It is determined whether or not the special game state is being executed based on the result of the special display 2 variable display game being a small hit (step Y771).

When it is in the small hit of special figure 2 (step Y771; Y), it moves to step Y774. On the other hand, when the small hit in special figure 2 is not in progress (step Y771; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y772). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y773). As a result, the first game state display unit 56 is turned off, and a display for instructing left-handed playing is provided. After that, the change of special figure 1 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y774), and the special figure 1 normal process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y775). The displayed process is terminated.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
40 and 41 show the special figure 2 displaying process (step Y144) in the special figure 2 game process described above. The special figure 2 displaying process is the same process as the special figure 1 displaying process described above for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 displaying process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag is set. The two areas are cleared (step Y812).

Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the special figure 2 variation start processing is loaded (step Y813), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is big hit information (step Y815). If the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y815; Y), the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed. The test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the special symbol 2 signal is ON) regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop design pattern is loaded from the hit design command area and prepared (step Y817), and effect command setting processing (step Y818) is performed. After that, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y819), and effect command setting processing (step Y820) is performed.
Next, the special winning opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a big hit in the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y821). In the case of the present embodiment, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as the signals corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability. Each ON/OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability.

After that, a big hit fanfare time (for example, 100 msec) corresponding to the big winning opening information is set (step Y822), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y823). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y824), and the game number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y825). Further, fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing (step Y826) is performed, and the processing for displaying special figure 2 ends.

On the other hand, if Toku-zu 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N), that is, if the big hit flag 2 is off information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information) (step Y827). .. Then, when the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y827; Y), it is determined whether or not it is a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y828), and when it is not a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y828; N), it is time. It is determined whether it is a shortened final variation (step Y829). Here, when the falling lottery for the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is won, it is determined that the high probability final fluctuation. Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is the special figure variable display game 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the time reduction final variation.

Then, when it is not the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y828; N) and when it is not the time shortening final fluctuation (step Y829; N), the process proceeds to step Y834. If it is a high-probability final change (step Y828; Y) or a time-shortening final change (step Y829; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y830), and a production command A setting process (step Y831) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y832), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y833).
In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but the player is not made aware of the occurrence of the small hit. In order to do so, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.

Next, a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area to prepare (step Y834), and effect command setting processing (step Y835) is performed. Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y836), effect command setting processing (step Y837) is performed, and a signal relating to a right-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y838). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned on. Then, the number in the right hit state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y839). As a result, the first gaming state display unit 56 is turned on, and the display for instructing the right-handed is given.
After that, the lower special winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step Y840), the fraud monitoring outside flag is saved in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y841), and special figure 2 small hit fanfare processing The shift setting process (step Y857) is performed, and the special figure 2 displaying process is ended.

When the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y827; N), it is determined whether or not it is a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y843), and when it is not a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y843; N), the time is shortened. It is determined whether it is the final variation (step Y844). Here, when the falling lottery for the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is won, it is determined that the high probability final fluctuation. Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is the special figure variable display game 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the time reduction final variation.

Then, when it is not the high-probability final change (step Y843; N) and when it is not the time shortening final change (step Y844; N), the process proceeds to step Y850. If it is a high-probability final change (step Y843; Y) or if it is a time-shortening final change (step Y844; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y845), and a production command A setting process (step Y846) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y847), and the signal regarding the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first gaming state display portion 56 is turned off, and the display for instructing left-handed playing is provided. After that, the change of special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y850), and the special figure 2 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y851). The displayed process is terminated.

That is, the game control device 100 generates the first special game state in which the first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the operation of the condition device is generated based on the fact that the variable display game has the first special result. Second special game generating means for forming a second special game state for opening the special variable winning device without operating the condition device, based on the fact that the variable display game has the second special result. Eggplant

[Processing during fanfare/interval]
42 and 43 show the fanfare/interval processing (steps Y112 and Y145) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this fanfare/interval processing, it is first determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y941). If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step Y941; N), the fanfare/interval processing is ended. On the other hand, when the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y941; Y), it is determined whether it is the first round (step Y942).

If it is not the first round (step Y942; N), the process proceeds to step Y950. On the other hand, in the case of the first round (step Y942; Y), it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 (step Y943). Here, in the present embodiment, the special game state is started by the game ball passing through the universal figure starting gate 34 after the big hit (first special result) is derived in the special figure variable display game. There is.

When the game ball has not passed through the universal starting gate 34 (step Y943; N), the fanfare/interval processing is ended. On the other hand, when the game ball has passed the universal figure starting gate 34 (step Y943; Y), the round number upper limit value table is set (step Y944), and the round number upper limit corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is set. A value (10 in the case of the present embodiment) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area (step Y945). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y946).

Next, the upper special winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step Y947), and the fraud monitoring outside period flag is saved in the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y948). Thereafter, the ON output data of the accessory continuous operation device operating signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y949), and the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step Y950). Then, a round command corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is prepared (step Y951), and effect command setting processing (step Y952) is performed.

Next, a big hit medium processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y953), and the pointer initial value is saved in the big hit medium processing control pointer area (step Y954). The special winning opening time corresponding to the mouth opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y955). The initial value of the processing control pointer during the big hit is set to 0 when opening and closing are repeated in one round. In the present embodiment, long open with V corresponds. In addition, when performing the opening once in one round, the jackpot operation end value (2 in this embodiment) is set. The initial value may be set to other than 0 according to the number of times of opening and closing in one round.

Next, it is determined whether it is a lever solenoid operation round (step Y956). The lever solenoid operation round is a round in which the lever solenoid 38f is operated to operate the lever member, and in the case of the present embodiment, it is only the first specific round. If it is the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; Y), the operation data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y957). As a result, the data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared. On the other hand, if it is not the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; N), the stop data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y958).

After that, 4 is set as the process number (step Y959), and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y960). If it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y960; Y), the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y961), and the special winning opening time is set to the special figure 1 game process timer area. Save to (step Y962). On the other hand, if it is not the big hit of special figure 1 (step Y960; N), that is, if it is the big hit of special figure 2, the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y963), and the special winning opening is opened. The time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y964).

Then, the signal related to the opening of the special winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y965). Here, the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal is set to ON. Next, in order to open the opening/closing member of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper special winning opening ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y966), and the number of winnings to the special winning opening is counted. The special winning opening count number is cleared (step Y967), and the fanfare/interval processing is ended.

In this embodiment, as shown in, for example, FIG. 6 and FIG. 7, in the special game state based on the big hit (first special game state), only the upper special winning opening (first special variation device 38) is opened, and the small In the special game state (second special game state) based on the hit, only the lower special winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is opened, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the opening mode in the first special game state may be such that the upper special winning opening is opened in the first round and the lower special winning opening is opened in the second and subsequent rounds.

[Special map 1 big hit end processing]
FIG. 44 shows the special figure 1 big hit ending process (step Y115) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 big hit ending process, first, a subroutine call is made based on the time reduction determination data (step Y1101). If the time reduction determination data is no time saving in step Y1101, the big hit end setting process 1 (step Y1102) is performed. If the time reduction determination data is time saving in step Y1101, the big hit end setting process 2 ( Step Y1103) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether there is specific area passage information (step Y1104). In the present embodiment, the specific area passage flag is set when a game ball flows into the specific area (probability change operation area), and when the specific area passage flag is set, it is determined that there is specific area passage information. .. When there is no specific area passage information (step Y1104; N), the process proceeds to step Y1106. On the other hand, if there is specific area passage information (step Y1104; Y), big hit end setting processing 3 (step Y1105) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1106), and the game ball to the specific area (probability change operation area) in the special game state based on the normal big hit (10R normal big hit in this embodiment) It is determined whether or not the flow is through the irregular flow of the specific area, which is the inflow of (step Y1107).

If it does not pass the specific area irregularity (step Y1107; N), the process proceeds to step Y1109. On the other hand, if it is a specific area irregular passage (step Y1107; Y), irregular probability variation information is added to the probability information command (step Y1108), and effect command setting processing (step Y1109) is performed. The probability information command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the process of step Y1109. As the probability information command transmitted here, there are a plurality of commands including performance mode information in any one of "high probability/time saving", "low probability/time saving", and "low probability/time saving". Yes, in the case of a probability variation operating region irregular passage, irregular probability variation information is added.

Next, "0" relating to the special figure 1 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1110), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1111). Next, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1112). Here, one big hit signal and three big hit signals are set to OFF. Then, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1113). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 per signal and the special symbol 2 per signal is set to OFF.

Next, the number of lights off is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1114), the flag during fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1115), and the special figure status area is cleared. (Step Y1116). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game become special figure status 0, which indicates a state in which neither the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. Then, the special figure 2 game wait time value (for example, 8 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1117), and the special figure 1 big hit ending process is ended.

By performing this special figure 1 big hit end processing, the special figure variation display game can be started for both special figure 1 and special figure 2, but in the timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game is performed after the special figure 1 game processing. In order to perform the processing, the processing for starting the special figure variation display game is performed in the special figure 2 game processing by the timer interrupt that has performed the special figure 1 jackpot end processing, and the special figure 2 variation display game is performed rather than the special figure 1 variable display game. Will be able to start first. Therefore, in step Y1117, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area so that the start processing for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing. The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.
That is, in the game control device 100, after the special game state ends, the second variable display game execution control means sets the second variable display game execution control means until the first variable display game execution control means can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game. A game processing waiting means is provided to prevent the processing relating to the start of the two-variable display game from being made executable.

[Special figure 2 Big hit end processing]
FIG. 45 shows the special figure 2 big hit end process (step Y148) in the special figure 2 game process described above. The special figure 2 big hit ending processing is the same processing except that step Y1109 in the above-mentioned special figure 1 big hit processing is not performed. In the special figure 2 big hit ending process, first, a subroutine call is made based on the time reduction determination data (step Y1131). If the time reduction determination data is no time saving in step Y1131, the big hit end setting process 1 (step Y1132) is performed, and if the time reduction determination data is time saving in step Y1131, the big hit end setting process 2 ( Step Y1133) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether there is specific area passage information (step Y1134), and if there is no specific area passage information (step Y1134; N), the process proceeds to step Y1136. On the other hand, when there is specific area passage information (step Y1134; Y), big hit end setting processing 3 (step Y1135) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1136), and the game ball to the specific area (probability change operation area) in the special game state based on the normal big hit (10R normal big hit in this embodiment) It is determined whether or not it is the inflow of a specific area irregularly (step Y1137).

If it does not pass the specific area irregularity (step Y1137; N), the process proceeds to step Y1139. On the other hand, if it is a specific area irregular passage (step Y1137; Y), irregular probability variation information is added to the probability information command (step Y1138), and effect command setting processing (step Y1139) is performed. The probability information command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the process of step Y1139. As the probability information command transmitted here, there are a plurality of commands including performance mode information in any one of "high probability/time saving", "low probability/time saving", and "low probability/time saving". Yes, in the case of a probability variation operating region irregular passage, irregular probability variation information is added.

Next, "0" relating to the special figure 2 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1140), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1141). Next, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1143). Here, one big hit signal and three big hit signals are set to OFF. Then, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1143). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 per signal and the special symbol 2 per signal is set to OFF.

Next, the off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1144), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1145), and the special figure status area is cleared. (Step Y1146), the special figure 2 big hit ending processing is ended. By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game become special figure status 0, which indicates a state in which neither the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 46A shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (steps Y1102 and 1132) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the start without time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1151). Here, the two jackpot signals are set to OFF. At this point, the data is only set and not output.

Next, the signal related to the start without time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1152). Here, special symbol 1 high probability state signal, special symbol 2 high probability state signal, special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal, ordinary symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and ordinary electric accessory 1 Set the open extension status signal to OFF.
After that, the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1153), and the universal figure without time saving flag is saved in the universal figure game mode flag area (step Y1154). Next, the special figure low probability and no time saving flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1155), and the time shortening variation number area for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the time saving state is set to 0. Clear (step Y1156).

Next, the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1157). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Next, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1158). As a result, the first gaming state display portion 56 is turned off, and the display for instructing left-handed playing is provided. After that, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y1159), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is ended. By this processing, a normal game state is set.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 46B shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (steps Y1103 and 1133) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal relating to the start of time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1161). Here, the two jackpot signals are set to ON. Incidentally, the jackpot 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, the signal related to the start with time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1162). Here, special symbol 1 high probability state signal, special symbol 2 high probability state signal, special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal, ordinary symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and ordinary electric accessory 1 Set the open/extended state signal to ON.
After that, the number with time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1163), and the universal figure time saving flag is saved in the universal figure game mode flag area (step Y1164). Next, the special figure low probability and time saving flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1165), and the initial value is set in the time shortening variation number area for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the time saving state. The value is saved (step Y1166). In the case of the present embodiment, since the support count is 100, 100 is saved as the initial value in step Y1166.

Then, the probability information command (time saving) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y1167), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. By this process, the special game low probability second specific game state. In the case of the present embodiment, the right hitting mode is set during the time saving state, but since the right hitting mode is set from during the big hit, the right hitting setting process 2 does not perform the right hitting setting.

[Big hit end setting process 3]
FIG. 47 shows the jackpot end setting process 3 (steps Y1105 and Y1135) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In the jackpot end setting process 3, first, a signal relating to the start of special figure time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1171). Here, the two jackpot signals are set to ON. Incidentally, the jackpot 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, a signal related to the start with high probability and shortening of time is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1172). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal and the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal are set to ON. After that, a number with time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1173), and a special figure high probability and time saving flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1174).

Next, the signal relating to the right-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1175). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1176). As a result, the first gaming state display unit 56 is turned on, and the display for instructing the right-handed is given. Thereafter, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y1177), and the jackpot end setting process 3 is ended. By this processing, a high probability state is achieved. That is, by executing the big hit end setting process 1 and then the big hit end setting process 3, the first specific game state is achieved, and by executing the big hit end setting process 2 and then the big hit end setting process 3, the special figure high probability is increased. It becomes the second specific game state.
Through the above processing, it is possible to set the specific game state which is a high probability state after the end of the first special game state. That is, the game control device 100 has a specific game state (first specific game state ST2, second special game state ST3 with high special figure probability) in which the probability of a special variation display game result being a special result is higher than that in the normal state. It constitutes a specific game state generating means capable of generating.

[Small hit fanfare medium processing]
FIG. 48 shows the small hitting fanfare middle processing (step Y149) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing. In this small hitting fanfare middle processing, first, the small big winning opening opening command is prepared (step Y1201), and the effect command setting processing (step Y1202) is performed. Then, 8 is set as the process number for the small hitting process (step Y1203), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1204).

Next, the small hit opening time (for example, 1600 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1205), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation (the special electric auditors 2 working signal is ON) is a test signal. The data is saved in the output data area (step Y1206). Then, the lower big prize hole on data is saved in the big prize hole solenoid output data area (step Y1207), and the big prize hole count number area for counting the number of prizes to the big prize hole is cleared (step Y1208). The processing during the hit fanfare ends.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 49 shows the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y152) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In the special figure 2 small hit ending process, first, 0 which is related to the special figure 2 normal process is set as a process number (step Y1331), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1332).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag region (step Y1334), the off number is saved in the round LED pointer region (step Y1335), and the special figure status region is cleared ( Step Y1336). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game become special figure status 0, which indicates a state in which neither the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special map low probability & no time saving (in the normal gaming state) is being performed (step Y1337), and if the special map low probability & no time saving is in progress (step Y1337; N), the process proceeds to step Y1340. To do. If the special figure low probability & time saving is not in progress (step Y1337; Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1338). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1339), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (step Y1340).

When the special figure 1 variable display game is not suspended (step Y1340; N), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (step Y1340; Y), a decorative special figure 1 restart command is prepared (step Y1341), and effect command setting processing (step Y1342) is performed. Then, the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended. As a result, when the special game state based on the small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is finished, the special figure 2 variable display game that has been interrupted is restarted.

That is, the game control apparatus 100 is controlled by one of the first variable display game execution control means (game control apparatus 100) and the second variable display game execution control means (game control apparatus 100) by the variable display game execution control means. In the case where the execution control of the variable display game is performed, if the other variable display game whose execution control is performed by the other variable display game execution control has a special result, The resuming control means is capable of executing resuming control for resuming one of the variable display games which has been interrupted and which has been interrupted after the special game state based on the other variable display game ends.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the performance control device 300 performs a main process shown in FIG. 50 and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 50, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3) and the interrupt is permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7 is performed, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) of creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The reading of the input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed in the timer interrupt process. In the effect button input process, when the input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed, the effect contents are changed.

Then, the hall/player setting mode process is performed for accepting operations such as the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal, and the change of the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal by the player (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) of updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, a received command check process (step C12) that analyzes and responds to the command from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display edit process (step C13) that performs settings for controlling the progress of the effect and edits of drawing commands. ) To set the end of preparation of the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 ms) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, since the system cycle (one frame is 1/30 seconds) is created, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frame switching in later than 1/60 seconds). May be switched). When it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that the frame switching timing has come (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) for controlling output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b) and a decoration control process (step for controlling LEDs of the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, etc.). C18), a movable body control process (step C19) for controlling a motor and a solenoid of the board production device 44, and a board production setting process for controlling production by the notification unit 72, the point notification unit 73, the cumulative value notification unit 74, and the like. (Step C20) is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing WDT (Step C8).

[Reception command check processing]
FIG. 51 shows the received command check processing in the main processing described above. In this reception command check processing, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received during one frame (1/30 seconds) is loaded as the command reception number (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check processing ends. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not the command copying for the command reception number is completed is completed. It is determined (step C206). As described above, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer, but the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. Is configured. As a result, the command (data) can be moved to make a vacant space in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command. In addition, the command analysis can be collectively performed in one round of the main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copying of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that the copying of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207) and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N), the process returns to the step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process ends. As described above, in the received command check processing, the commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Reception command analysis processing]
FIG. 52 shows the received command analysis process in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis processing, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

When it is determined in step C232 or step C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step In C234; N), the received command analysis processing is ended.

When it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the variable system command (step C235). The fluctuation system command is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure. When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable system command (step C235; Y), the variable system command process (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of variable commands (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of big hit commands (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit medium performance (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen) or a command related to small hit medium performance (display of a fanfare screen or an end screen). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the big hit type command (step C237; Y), the big hit type command process (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

When it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the big hit type command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol type command (step C239). The symbol-based command is a command for instructing information related to the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special symbol). When MODE is determined to be in the range of the symbol system command (step C239; Y), the symbol system command process (step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol commands (step C239; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as the hold number command and error command. (Step C241). The single-shot command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense by combination like a pattern command and a variable command. This one-shot system command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information system command, an error/illegal system command, a model designation command, and the like. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot system command (step C241; Y), the single-shot system command process (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of prefetch symbol commands (step C243). When MODE is determined to be in the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C243; Y), the prefetch symbol system command process (step C244) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

In addition, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetch variable system command (step C245). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetching variable system command (step C245; Y), the prefetching variable system command process (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation type command (step C245; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

The look-ahead variation system command and the look-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The pre-reading effect (also referred to as the pre-reading notice or the pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure variation display game corresponding to the starting memory (hold) for which the special figure variation display game is not executed is a big hit when it is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance (or what kind of variation pattern) with a predetermined degree of reliability, the decoration special figure starting memory display or the like displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a manner different from usual, or the display device 41. It is an effect such as performing an effect display. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading variation system command and pre-reading pattern system command) is the command which notifies beforehand the fluctuation pattern and the stop design which correspond to the starting memory which becomes the target of pre-reading production, from game control control equipment 100 at the time of starting winning a prize It is transmitted to the performance control device 300. Note that normal variable-type commands and symbol-type commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variable display.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 53 shows the variable command processing (step C236) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this variable system command processing, it is first determined whether the special figure classification is undetermined (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the type of the special figure is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and is information set in step C251 of the symbol system command processing described above.

If the special figure type is not determined (step C361; Y), the variable system command processing is ended. If the special figure type is not undetermined (step C361; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, the combination of the variable command and the symbol command is checked (step C362), and the variable command and the symbol type are It is determined whether there is a mismatch (step C363).

If the variable command and the symbol type do not match (step C363; Y), the variable command processing ends. When the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C363; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, outlying symbols, 16R jackpot symbols, 10R jackpot symbols, and small hit symbols. When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent, when a deviating variation command (variation pattern command) is received, as when receiving a symbol command of the 16R big hit symbol It means that the combination is inconsistent (combination of variable command and symbol type).

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, a variation effect setting process for setting information for performing an effect according to the variation command is performed (step C365).

Next, the special figure changing state is set as the P machine state (state of the pachinko machine) (step C366). Here, the state of changing the special map indicates that the special map is changing (not during a customer waiting demonstration, a big hit, or a fanfare). Further, if the number of pre-reading effects (the number of pre-reading executions) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by -1 (a process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable system command process is ended.

[Variation effect setting process]
FIG. 54 shows the variable effect setting process (step C365) in the above-described variable command process. In this variation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern type is variation without reach (step C381). When the variation pattern type is the reachless variation (step C381; Y), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code and the special figure type and the presentation mode at that time is set (step C382). The effect mode corresponds to the game mode managed by the effect control device 300 and naturally varies depending on the model, but here, there are a normal mode and a probability variation mode. Further, within each mode, a plurality of modes are provided in which the distribution ratio of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41 are different.

Next, by referring to the first-half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of MODE and special figure types to be reserved is acquired (step C383). Accordingly, in the case of a reach-less variation, it is possible to change the lottery content of the notice effect that appears during each variation (specifically, the appearance rate of each notice effect mode) according to the number of reserves. After that, the first-half notice distribution group table is used to perform the lottery for the notice that appears during the first-half change (step C386).

On the other hand, when the variation pattern type is not reachless variation (step C381; N), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, and the symbol type is set (step C384). Then, referring to the first-half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the variation pattern type is acquired (step C385), and the first-half notice distribution group table is used to change the first-half notice. The preliminary announcement lottery that appears in (Step C386).

Next, the notice production of the latter half fluctuation is drawn. The latter half of the special figure variation display game is a so-called reach action (for example, variation display in a special result mode (special symbol combination) in which the display area excluding a specific area among the display areas of a plurality of columns of the special figure becomes a big hit. Is stopped and is variably displayed only in a specific area). On the other hand, the first half variation of the special figure variation display game is a variation display before the start of the reach action.

First, the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, and the symbol type is set (step C387). The latter half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting an address of the latter half notice distribution group table. Then, the address of the latter-half notice distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired by referring to the latter-half notice distribution group address table (step C388), and the second-half notice distribution group table is used to change the latter half (during reach). A preliminary announcement lottery is conducted (step C389).

After that, the content of the variable effect corresponding to MODE and ACT is determined (step C390), and the content of the effect corresponding to the notice lottery result is determined (step C391). As a result, an effect such as a variation time of the decorative special figure variation display game and main reach contents and a notice are decided. Further, a stop symbol setting process for determining a stop symbol is also performed by referring to the determined variation pattern (reach effect, etc.) of the special figure variation display game, advance notice content, and game state (step C392).

Next, the display setting of the variable effect is set (step C393), and the display setting of the notice effect is set (step C394). By these processes, the effect and advance notice in the decorative special figure variable display game set as described above can be executed. Then, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special map type is performed (step C395). In this process, the setting for reducing the decoration start memory display is made corresponding to the decrease in the start memory corresponding to the start of the special figure variation display game.

Then, a sound number, which is a BGM number, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp, etc., are set (step C396), and a decoration special figure variation (variation display of identification information) corresponding to the special figure type is set. Display settings are made (step C397). Further, in addition to the variable display of the identification information, in order to set the variable display of the fourth symbol that displays the decorative special figure variable display game, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type is performed (step C398). , The variation effect setting process ends.

<Small hits>
As described above, there may be a plurality of types of opening (opening time and number of times of opening) in the second special game state (special game state based on small hit), in which case, for example, which one is based on the small hit symbol. Determine whether to set (adopt) the opening mode. That is, the small hit type may be plural types instead of one type.
FIG. 55(a) shows an example of the distribution probability of the small hit type when the small hit is won, when there are three kinds of small hits, the first small hit, the second small hit and the third small hit. .. Further, FIGS. 55(b) to 55(d) show an example of an opening mode in each small hit type.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), in the special game state based on the first small hit, first, the small hit fanfare time is started, and when the small hit fanfare time is finished, the second special variation winning device 39 is opened, When the condition that either the openable time of 1600 milliseconds elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins, the second special variable winning device 39 is closed. After that, when the small hit remaining ball processing time is started and the small hit remaining ball processing time is ended, the small hit ending time is started, and when the small hit ending time is ended, the second special game state is ended. That is, in the special game state based on the first small hit, the number of times of opening is set to 1, and the opening time (openable time) is set to 1600 msec.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55(c), in the special game state based on the second small hit, the number of times of opening is set to 2, and the opening time (openable time) of each opening is set to 1600 msec. ing.
Further, as shown in FIG. 55(d), in the special game state based on the third small hit, the number of times of opening is set to 3, and the opening time (openable time) of each opening is set to 1600 msec. ing.
As shown in FIG. 55(a), the first small hit that causes the second special game state in which the opening count is 1 is the second small hit that causes the second special game state in which the open count is 2 times, A higher distribution probability is set as compared with the third small hit that causes the second special game state in which the number of releases is three times. That is, it is rare that the result of the special figure variation display game is the second small hit or the third small hit.

The effect control device 300 sets the stop symbol on the display device 41 based on the decoration special command from the game control device 100 in the stop symbol setting process (step C392) of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54).
Specifically, when the information on the stop symbol included in the decoration special command command is the information on the stop symbol corresponding to the first small hit, the first small hit symbol is set as the stop symbol. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 56A, the first small hit symbol (“123”) is stopped and displayed as a result of the decorative special figure variable display game. In the present embodiment, "123 (symbol combination lined up in the order of "1", "2", "3" from the left)" is the first small hit symbol, but the first small hit symbol is limited to "123". Instead, it can be changed as appropriate.

Further, when the information on the stop symbol included in the decoration special command is the information on the stop symbol corresponding to the second small hit, the second small hit symbol is set as the stop symbol. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 56B, the second small hit symbol (“234”) is stopped and displayed as a result of the decorative special figure variation display game. In the present embodiment, “234 (a combination of symbols arranged in the order of “2”, “3”, and “4” from the left)” is the second small hit symbol, but the second small hit symbol is limited to “234”. Instead, it can be changed as appropriate.
When the information about the stop symbol included in the decoration special command command is the information about the stop symbol corresponding to the third small hit, the third small hit symbol is set as the stop symbol. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 56(c), the third small hit symbol (“345”) is stopped and displayed as a result of the decorative special figure variation display game. In the present embodiment, "345 (a combination of symbols arranged in the order of "3""4""5" from the left)" is the third small hit symbol, but the third small hit symbol is limited to "345". Instead, it can be changed as appropriate.

Here, for example, as shown in FIGS. 56A to 56C, during the execution of the special figure variation display game, the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the main variation is displayed in the central portion of the display area of the display device 41. A decorative special figure game display portion 42a for displaying is provided. In the decoration special map game display portion 42a, the decoration identification information (large pattern) is variably displayed in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas, and then stopped and displayed, thereby displaying the decoration special figure fluctuation display game (first decoration game). Is displayed.
Further, in the corner (for example, the lower right) of the display area of the display device 41, the decoration identification information (small) which is relatively smaller than the decoration identification information (large pattern) variably displayed on the decoration special figure game display 42a. A small symbol variation display portion 42b that variably displays (design) is provided. In the small symbol variation display portion 42b, the decoration special information variation display game (second ornament game) is displayed by variably displaying the ornament identification information (small symbol) in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas, and then stopping the display. indicate.
In the present embodiment, the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to irregular variation is not displayed, but it may be displayed.

Further, in a corner portion (for example, the lower left portion) of the display area of the display device 41, a waiting pending display portion 42c that displays a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the main fluctuation among the undigested start memories. It is provided. The decoration special figure starting memory display displayed on the standby holding display section 42c has a one-to-one correspondence with the starting memory of the main fluctuation, and is displayed side by side in the order of storage. Of the decoration special drawing start memory display displayed on the standby hold display section 42c, the decoration special drawing start memory display at the right end is the decoration special drawing start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the main fluctuation stored first. , It moves to the right each time it is digested.
The effect control device 300 can execute the prefetching effect on the standby hold display unit 42c. Specifically, the degree of expectation that the result of the corresponding special figure variation display game will be a big hit (or the corresponding special figure variation display depending on the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed on the standby hold display section 42c) It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the variation pattern of the game will be a specific variation pattern.
Note that, in the drawing, the standby pending display portion 42c is surrounded by a dashed line for convenience of illustration, but the actual standby pending display portion 42c may or may not be surrounded by a line or the like.

In addition, on the corner (for example, the lower part) of the display area of the display device 41 and to the right of the standby pending display portion 42c, information regarding the starting memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed is displayed. A pending execution display section 42d is provided. At the start of the main fluctuation, the decoration special figure starting memory display at the right end of the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed in the waiting pending display section 42c is moved to the execution pending display section 42d. Has become.
The effect control device 300 can execute the notice effect on the in-progress hold display section 42d. Specifically, the degree of expectation that the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is a big hit depending on the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed on the execution pending display section 42d (or the special figure being executed). It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the variation pattern of the variable display game will be a specific variation pattern.
Note that, in the drawing, the execution-in-progress display section 42d is surrounded by a dashed-dotted line for the sake of convenience. However, the actual execution-in-progress display section 42d may or may not be surrounded by a line or the like.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first small hit pattern displayed on the decoration special map game display portion 42a and the first small hit pattern displayed on the small symbol variation display portion 42b are the same pattern, but The first small hit symbol displayed on the diagram game display portion 42a and the first small hit symbol displayed on the small symbol variation display portion 42b may be different symbols.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the second small hit pattern displayed on the decoration special map game display portion 42a and the second small hit pattern displayed on the small symbol variation display portion 42b are the same pattern, but The second small hit symbol displayed on the diagram game display portion 42a and the second small hit symbol displayed on the small symbol variation display portion 42b may be different symbols.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the third small hit pattern displayed on the decoration special map game display section 42a and the third small hit pattern displayed on the small pattern variation display section 42b are the same pattern. The third small hit symbol displayed on the figure game display portion 42a and the third small hit symbol displayed on the small symbol variation display portion 42b may be different symbols.
Further, in the present embodiment, the first small hit symbol displayed on the small symbol variation display portion 42b, the second small hit symbol displayed on the small symbol variation display portion 42b, and the small symbol variation display portion 42b. Although the third small hit symbol is different from the first small hit symbol displayed on the small symbol variation display part 42b, the second small hit symbol displayed on the small symbol variation display part 42b, and the small symbol. At least two of the third small hit symbols displayed on the variable display portion 42b may be the same symbol.

<Small jackpot replacement production>
When there are a plurality of small hit types, the effect control device 300 can execute a small hit symbol replacement effect in which the small hit symbols are replaced. In the present embodiment, as the small hit symbol replacement effect, when the special symbol fluctuation display game that is the first small hit is continuously executed, the first small hit symbol is the second small hit symbol or the third small hit symbol. Perform an effect to replace the design.

First, an example of the display on the display device 41 when the small hit symbol replacement effect is not executed will be described with reference to FIG. 57.
When the first specific game state ST2 (small hit RUSH mode) is started, for example, as shown in FIG. 57(a), the first specific game state ST2 A cumulative award ball number display section 42e is provided which indicates the number of award balls acquired from the start. Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the first small hit, for example, as shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 57(b), the decorative special figure game display section 42a and the small symbol variation display. In the portion 42b, the decoration identification information is variably displayed in a high-speed variation mode (variably displayed at a speed that is difficult to identify), and then the first small hit symbol (“123”) is stopped and displayed.

Next, a special game state based on the first small hit (a second special game state in which the number of releases is one) occurs. When the second special game state occurs, for example, as shown in FIG. 57(c), the number of award balls acquired in the second special game state is displayed in the corner (for example, the upper left portion) of the display area of the display device 41. The prize ball number display portion 42f is provided. In the present embodiment, since the big winning opening is 15 prize balls, as shown in FIGS. 57(c) and 57(d), for example, as shown in FIGS. The value is updated by +15. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 57(e), during the ending time of the second special game state, the value of the award ball number display portion 42f shifts to the accumulated award ball number display portion 42e to display the accumulated award ball number. It is added to the value of the part 42e.

Next, when the next special figure variation display game starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 57(f), in the decoration special figure game display section 42a and the small symbol variation display section 42b, the variation of the ornament identification information in the high-speed variation mode is changed. The display starts. Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the first small hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 57(g), in the decoration special figure game display section 42a and the small symbol variation display section 42b, The first small hit symbol (“123”) is stopped and displayed.

Next, a special game state based on the first small hit (a second special game state in which the number of times of opening is one) occurs, and for example, as shown in FIG. 57(h), every time a game ball wins the big winning opening. The value of the prize ball number display portion 42f is updated by +15. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 57(i), during the ending time of the second special game state, the value of the prize ball count display portion 42f is added to the value of the cumulative prize ball count display portion 42e.

Next, an example of the display on the display device 41 in the case of executing the small hit symbol replacement effect of replacing the first small hit symbol with the second small hit symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 58.
When the execution of the small hit symbol symbol replacement effect is set (the second small hit symbol symbol replacement flag (described later) is set) and the first special symbol variable display game is started, for example, as shown in FIG. In the special figure game display section 42a and the small symbol variation display section 42b, the variation display in the high-speed variation mode of the decoration identification information is started. Since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the first small hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(b), the first small hit symbol (“123”) is displayed in the small symbol variation display section 42b. It will be stopped. On the other hand, the second small hit symbol (“234”) is stopped and displayed on the decorative special figure game display portion 42a. That is, in the small hit design replacement effect of the present embodiment, only the small hit design displayed on the decorative special figure game display unit 42a is replaced, and the small hit design displayed on the small design variation display unit 42b is not replaced. It is like this.

Next, a special game state based on the first small hit (a second special game state in which the number of times of opening is one) occurs, and, for example, as shown in FIGS. 58(c) and (d), a game ball is placed in the special winning opening. Each time the player wins the prize, the value of the prize ball number display section 42f is updated by +15. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(e), during the ending time of the second special game state, the value of the award ball number display portion 42f is added to the value of the cumulative award ball number display portion 42e.

Next, when the next special figure variation display game starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(f), high-speed variation display of ornament identification information (variation display in high-speed variation mode) is started in the small symbol variation display section 42b. It On the other hand, a temporary stop display of the second small hit symbol (variable display in the temporary stop mode) is started on the decorative special figure game display portion 42a. That is, in the small hit design replacement effect of the present embodiment, not only the small hit design displayed on the decoration special map game display part 42a, but also the variable display game (first part) displayed on the decoration special game display part 42a. The variation mode of the decoration game) is also replaced. Then, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the first small hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(g), the first small hit symbol (“123”) is displayed in the small symbol variation display section 42b. It is stopped. On the other hand, the second special hit symbol (“234”) is stopped and displayed in the decorative special figure game display portion 42a.

Next, a special game state based on the first small hit (a second special game state in which the number of times of opening is one) occurs, and for example, as shown in FIG. 58(h), every time a game ball wins the big winning opening. The value of the prize ball number display portion 42f is updated by +15. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(i), during the ending time of the second special game state, the value of the prize ball count display portion 42f is added to the value of the cumulative prize ball count display portion 42e.

Next, an example of the display on the display device 41 in the case of executing the small hit symbol replacement effect of replacing the first small hit symbol with the third small hit symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 59.
When the execution of the small hitting symbol replacement effect is set (the third small hitting symbol replacement flag (described later) is set) and the first special symbol variation display game starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 59(a), decoration In the special figure game display section 42a and the small symbol variation display section 42b, the variation display in the high-speed variation mode of the decoration identification information is started. Since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the first small hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 59(b), the first small hit symbol (“123”) is displayed in the small symbol variation display section 42b. It will be stopped. On the other hand, in the decorative special figure game display portion 42a, the third small hit symbol ("345") is stopped and displayed.

Next, a special game state based on the first small hit (a second special game state in which the number of times of opening is one) occurs, and for example, as shown in FIG. 59(c), every time a game ball wins the big winning opening. The value of the prize ball number display portion 42f is updated by +15. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 59(d), during the ending time of the second special game state, the value of the prize ball count display portion 42f is added to the value of the cumulative prize ball count display portion 42e.

Next, when the next special figure variation display game starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 59(e), high-speed variation display of ornament identification information (variation display in high-speed variation mode) is started in the small symbol variation display section 42b. It On the other hand, a temporary stop display of the third small hit symbol (variable display in the temporary stop mode) is started on the decorative special figure game display portion 42a. Since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the first small hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 59(f), the first small hit symbol (“123”) is displayed in the small symbol variation display section 42b. It is stopped. On the other hand, in the decorative special figure game display portion 42a, the third small hit symbol ("345") is stopped and displayed.

Next, a special game state based on the first small hit (a second special game state in which the number of times of opening is one) occurs, and for example, as shown in FIG. 59(g), every time a game ball wins the big winning opening. The value of the prize ball number display portion 42f is updated by +15. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 59(h), during the ending time of the second special game state, the value of the prize ball count display portion 42f is added to the value of the cumulative prize ball count display portion 42e.

Next, when the next special figure variation display game starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 59(i), high-speed variation display of ornament identification information (variation display in high-speed variation mode) is started in the small symbol variation display section 42b. It On the other hand, a temporary stop display of the third small hit symbol (variable display in the temporary stop mode) is started on the decorative special figure game display portion 42a. Then, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the first small hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 59(j), the first small hit symbol (“123”) is displayed in the small symbol variation display section 42b. It is stopped. On the other hand, in the decorative special figure game display portion 42a, the third small hit symbol ("345") is stopped and displayed.

Next, the special game state based on the first small hit (the second special game state in which the number of times of opening is 1) occurs, and the value of the prize ball number display section 42f is updated by +15 every time the game ball is won in the special winning opening. To be done. Then, during the ending time of the second special game state, the value of the award ball number display portion 42f is added to the value of the cumulative award ball number display portion 42e.
57 to 59, the standby hold display unit 42c and the execution hold display unit 42d are displayed, but the standby hold display unit 42c and the execution hold display unit 42d are not displayed. good.

In order to execute the small hit symbol replacement effect, the effect control device 300 performs the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process, for example, at the end of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54) (that is, after step C398).
FIG. 60(a) shows an example of the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process. In this small hit symbol replacement effect determination process, first, it is determined whether the second small hit symbol replacement flag or the third small hit symbol replacement flag is set (step C401), and the second small hit symbol replacement If both the flag and the third small hit symbol replacement flag are not set (step C401; N), whether the stop symbol set in the stop symbol setting process (step C392) is the first small hit symbol or not The determination is made (step C402).

If the stop symbol set in the stop symbol setting process is not the first small hit symbol (step C402; N), that is, the stop symbol set in the stop symbol setting process is off, the big hit symbol, the second small hit symbol, or the third. If it is a small hit symbol, the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process is ended.
On the other hand, if the stop symbol set in the stop symbol setting process is the first small hit symbol (step C402; Y), that is, if the result of the special symbol variation display game this time is the first small hit symbol, the small hit symbol A lottery for the symbol replacement effect, specifically, a random number lottery for determining whether to execute the small hit symbol replacement effect (step C403).

When the lottery for the small hit symbol replacement effect is lost (step C404; N), the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process is ended.
On the other hand, if you win the small hit symbol replacement effect lottery (step C404; Y), the result of the next special symbol variation display game is the first small based on the prefetch stop symbol command from the game control device 100. It is determined whether or not there is a hit (step C405).

When the result of the next special figure variation display game is not the first small hit (step C405; N), that is, the result of the next special figure variation display game is off, and it is a big hit, a second small hit, or a third small hit. If there is, or if the prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the next special symbol variation display game is not received, the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process is ended.
On the other hand, when the result of the next special figure variation display game is the first small hit (step C405; Y), based on the look-ahead stop symbol command from the game control device 100, the next special figure variation display game It is determined whether the result is the first small hit (step C406).

When the result of the special figure variation display game of the next one is not the first small hit (step C406; N), that is, the result of the special figure variation display game of the next one is out, big hit, second small hit, or third small hit. If there is, or if the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the next special figure variation display game is not received, the stop symbol (first small hit symbol) set in the stop symbol setting process (step C392) is Replace with 2 small hit symbols (step C407), set the second small hit symbol replacement flag (step C408), set "1" to the number of consecutive times (step C409), and determine the small hit symbol replacement effect. The process ends.
In Step C407, only the information on the stop symbol displayed on the decorative special figure game display portion 42a is rewritten, and the information on the stop symbol displayed on the small symbol variable display portion 42b is not rewritten. As a result, when the variation of the special map variation display game this time (that is, the first special symbol variation display game with the execution of the small hit symbol symbol replacement effect set (the second small hit symbol symbol substitution flag is set)) is stopped, The first small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the small symbol variation display portion 42b, and the second small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the decorative special figure game display portion 42a (see FIG. 58(b)).

On the other hand, when the result of the special figure variation display game one after another is the first small hit (step C406; Y), the stop symbol (first small hit symbol) set in the stop symbol setting process (step C392) Replace with 3 small hit symbols (step C410), set the third small hit symbol replacement flag (step C411), set "2" to the number of consecutive times (step C412), small hit symbol replacement effect determination The process ends.
In step C410, only the information on the stop symbol displayed on the decorative special figure game display portion 42a is rewritten, and the information on the stop symbol displayed on the small symbol variable display portion 42b is not rewritten. As a result, when the variation of the special map variation display game this time (that is, the first special symbol variation display game with the execution of the small hit symbol symbol replacement effect set (the third small hit symbol symbol substitution flag is set)) is stopped, The first small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the small symbol variation display portion 42b, and the third small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the decorative special figure game display portion 42a (see FIG. 59(b)).

Further, if the second small hit symbol replacement flag or the third small hit symbol replacement flag is set (step C401; Y), that is, the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process is the next special symbol fluctuation. If it is executed in the variation effect setting process (FIG. 54) executed at the start of the display game or at the start of the special display variation display game one after another, the decoration special figure set at step C397 of the variation effect setting process. The change and the stop symbol set in step C392 of the change effect setting process are replaced (step C413).

Specifically, when the second small hit symbol replacement flag is set, the decoration special map fluctuation set in step C397 (variation display in the high speed fluctuation mode of the decoration identification information) is set to the second small hit symbol. While changing to the variable display in the temporary stop mode, the stop symbol (first small hit symbol) set in step C392 is changed to the second small hit symbol. In Step C413, only the information on the decorative special figure fluctuation and the stop symbol displayed on the decorative special figure game display section 42a is rewritten, and the information on the decorative special figure fluctuation and the stop symbol displayed on the small symbol fluctuation display section 42b is rewritten. There is no such thing. As a result, during the next variation of the special figure variation display game, the decoration identification information is displayed at high speed in the small symbol variation display section 42b, and the second small hit symbol is temporarily displayed in the ornament special figure game display section 42a. (See FIG. 58(f)), and at the next stop of fluctuation of the special figure variation display game, the first small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the small symbol variation display section 42b, and the decorative special figure game display section 42a. At, the second small hit symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 58(g)).

If the third small hit symbol replacement flag is set, the decoration special map fluctuation set in step C397 (variable display of the decoration identification information in the high-speed fluctuation mode) is temporarily stopped for the third small hit symbol. While changing to the variable display in the mode, the stop symbol (first small hit symbol) set in step C392 is changed to the third small hit symbol. In Step C413, only the information on the decorative special figure fluctuation and the stop symbol displayed on the decorative special figure game display section 42a is rewritten, and the information on the decorative special figure fluctuation and the stop symbol displayed on the small symbol fluctuation display section 42b is rewritten. There is no such thing. As a result, during the change of the next special figure variation display game and the next special figure variation display game, the decoration identification information is displayed at high speed in the small symbol variation display section 42b, and at the same time in the decoration special figure game display section 42a. 3 small hit symbols are temporarily displayed (see FIGS. 59(e) and (i)), and at the time of fluctuation stop of the next special figure fluctuation display game and the next special figure fluctuation display game, the small symbol fluctuation display section 42b. The first small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, and the third small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the decorative special figure game display portion 42a (see FIGS. 59(f) and (j)).

Next, the continuous count is updated by -1 (step C414), and it is determined whether the continuous count is 0 (step C415).
When the number of consecutive times is not 0 (step C415; N), that is, when the third small hit symbol replacement flag is set, the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process is the next special symbol variation display game. When it is executed in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54) executed at the start of, the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process is ended.
On the other hand, when the number of consecutive times is 0 (step C415; Y), that is, when the second small hit symbol replacement flag is set, the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process is the next special figure. When the variation effect setting process (FIG. 54) executed at the start of the variable display game is executed, or when the third small hit symbol replacement flag is set, the small hit symbol replacement is performed. When the effect determination process is executed in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54) that is executed at the start of the special figure variation display game one after another, the set small hit symbol replacement flag is cleared (step (C416), the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 61(a), when the special figure variation display game that is the first small hit is continuously executed twice, the special winning opening is 2 in total. In order to open twice, the small hit symbol replacement effect for replacing the second small hit symbol indicating that the number of times of opening is two is executed. In this small hit design replacement effect, control for displaying the second small hit symbol once is performed instead of the control for displaying the first small hit symbol twice (displayed twice with the high-speed variable display in between).
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 61(b), when the special figure variation display game which is the first small hit is executed three times in a row, the special winning opening is opened three times in total. The small-hit symbol replacement effect for replacing the third small-hit symbol indicating that the number of times is 3 times is executed. In this small hit design replacement effect, control for displaying the third small hit design once is performed instead of the control for displaying the first small hit design three times (three times with the high-speed variable display being interposed).

In the example shown in FIG. 61(a), the result of the third game (the next special figure variation display game) is out of proportion, but the result of the third game is other than the first small hit (the third small hit). If the result of the game is undecided, that is, the starting memory corresponding to the third game is not stored).
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 61B, the result of the fourth game is off, but the result of the fourth game is other than the first small hit (when the result of the fourth game is undecided). That is, the case where the starting memory corresponding to the fourth game is not stored is included).

FIG. 60(b) shows an example of the winning probability of the lottery for the small hit symbol replacement effect. In the present embodiment, the winning probability differs depending on the current probability setting value, so the current probability setting value can be suggested by the small hit symbol. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 60(b), the larger the current probability setting value, the higher the winning probability. That is, the larger the current probability setting value, the higher the probability of being replaced with the second small hit symbol or the third small hit symbol.

The big hit probability can be changed by changing the probability setting value, but the small hit probability cannot be changed by changing the probability setting value. Therefore, in the case of a gaming machine in which the small hit symbol replacement effect cannot be executed, the present probability setting value cannot be suggested by the appearance frequency of the first small hit symbol, the second small hit symbol, and the third small hit symbol. On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the small hit symbol replacement effect, and the larger the current probability setting value is, the higher the probability that the second small hit symbol or the third small hit symbol is replaced. Therefore, it is possible to make a setting suggestion that is easy for the player to understand that the higher the number of the second small hitting symbols and the third small hitting symbols appearing, the higher the setting can be expected.
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55A, for example, a special figure variation display game with a second small hit and a special figure variation display game with a third small hit are rarely executed. Therefore, the difference in the appearance frequency of the second small hitting symbol and the third small hitting symbol becomes clear depending on whether the current probability setting value is large or small, so that it is possible to make a more intuitive setting suggestion. ing.

For example, it is possible to give a setting suggestion by giving variations to the types of the small hit symbols and the display methods of the small hit symbols. For example, when two types of first small hit symbols, a first small hit symbol A that is more likely to be selected as the probability setting value is larger, and a first small hit symbol B that is more likely to be selected as the probability setting value is smaller, Even if the winning symbol replacement effect is not executable, it is possible to suggest the probability setting value that is currently set. In addition, for example, the small hitting pattern display method is provided with a first method of rolling and then stopping and a second method of vertically shaking and then stopping, and the larger the probability setting value, the first method is selected. If the probability setting value is smaller and the second method is easier to select as the probability setting value is smaller, it is possible to suggest the probability setting value that is currently set, even if the small hit symbol replacement effect is not executable. However, in these cases, the amount of information increases when the small hits continue, which may confuse the player.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the small hit design replacement effect can be executed, the minimum required small hit design is used, and only the number of times the small hit design is displayed (the number of stop displays) indicates the setting. Since it can be performed, the player is not confused even if a small hit occurs continuously due to rapid fluctuation.

In the present embodiment, as shown in, for example, FIG. 60(b), the larger the probability setting value, the higher the winning probability in the lottery for the small hit symbol replacement production. However, the larger the probability setting value, the smaller the win. It is also possible to make the winning probability low in the lottery of the symbol replacement effect.
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60B, for example, the same winning probability is assigned to “setting 1” and “setting 2”, but different to “setting 1” and “setting 2”. A winning probability may be assigned. The same applies to “setting 3” and “setting 4” and “setting 5” and “setting 6”. That is, the number of stages is not limited as long as the winning probability can be switched in multiple stages.

Here, the temporary stop mode is, for example, a mode in which the decoration identification information is displayed in a swinging manner at a fixed position. The swinging direction in the temporary stop mode may be the same as the adjacent decoration identification information as shown in, for example, FIG. 61C, or the adjacent decoration as shown in, for example, FIG. 61D. The direction may be opposite to the identification information, but from the viewpoint of more easily grasping the accurate game situation, it is preferable that the swing direction in the temporary stop mode is opposite to the adjacent decoration identification information.
In the present embodiment, in the display area of the display device 41, not only the decoration special figure game display section 42a but also the small symbol variation display section 42b is provided, and even if the small winning symbol exchange effect lottery is won, the small symbol variation is generated. The stop design and the decorative special figure fluctuation displayed on the display unit 42b are not replaced. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the accurate game situation by the decorative special figure variable display game (second decorative game) on the small symbol variable display section 42b. For example, as shown in FIG. 58(f), FIG. 59(e), and FIG. 59(i), the decoration identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed on the decoration special figure game display portion 42a during the change of the special figure fluctuation display game. However, since the decoration identification information is displayed at a high speed in the small symbol variation display portion 42b, the small symbol variation display portion 42b shows that the variation is not being stopped (the special symbol variation display game is executed. I know that it is inside). However, from the viewpoint of making it easier to understand that it is changing, the swinging direction in the temporary stop mode is preferably opposite to the adjacent decoration identification information, as shown in FIG. 61D, for example. ..

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the start condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, the variation winning device (first It is a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state (first special game state, second special game state) in which the special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39) are opened, and rather than a game being executed. Previously, a pre-determination means (game control device 100) for determining the game, and a display control means (effect control device 300) for displaying a symbol combination mode corresponding to the result of the game on the display device 41, the symbol In the combination mode, the first special result (first small hit) corresponding to the first special result (first small hit) of the special results, and the second special result (second small hit) of the special results There is a second symbol combination mode (second small hit symbol) corresponding to (win), and when the game result is the first special result, the number of times the variable winning device is opened is the first number (one time). When a special game state (second special game state) is generated and the game result is the second special result, the number of times the variable winning device is opened is N times (twice) the first number. When a special game state (second special game state) that is a certain number of times (two times) occurs, and the display control unit determines that the game having the first special result is N times consecutively based on the determination result of the preliminary determination unit. If determined, it is possible to execute a replacement effect (small hitting symbol replacement effect) for replacing the symbol combination mode displayed on the display device 41, and in the replacement effect, control for displaying the first symbol combination mode N times. Instead, it is configured to perform control to display the second symbol combination mode once (see FIG. 60(a)).

That is, the number of releases (total of the number of releases shown by the display of the first symbol combination mode of a plurality of times) indicated by the symbol combination mode before replacement, and the number of releases (one second symbol combination by the symbol combination mode after replacement) It is possible to execute a replacement effect (small hitting symbol replacement effect) in which display control is performed so that the number of times of opening shown by the display of the aspect becomes the same number. Therefore, without changing the number of times the symbol combination mode shows before and after replacement, it is possible to combine the display of a plurality of symbol combination modes into one display of the symbol combination mode, and thus the symbol combination mode (small hit pattern) The interest of can be raised.
In particular, in the first specific game state ST2 (small hit RUSH mode), small hits occur frequently, so by displaying a plurality of symbol combination modes in a single symbol combination mode, the player can It is possible to provide a simple and easy-to-understand display.

The first number of times is not limited to once, and may be a plurality of times, for example.
Further, N times is not limited to twice, and can be appropriately changed as long as it is multiple times. That is, the second number of times is not limited to two and can be appropriately changed as long as it is a plurality of times.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment can set one probability setting value from among a plurality of probability setting values to which the probability values used for the lottery of the game (special figure variation display game) are assigned. The control device 100) is provided, and the display control means (effect control device 300) executes the replacement effect (small hitting symbol replacement effect) with a different selection rate according to the probability setting value set by the setting means. It can be configured to select whether or not (see FIG. 60(b)).
By configuring in this way, the probability setting value currently set can be suggested by the appearance frequency of the first symbol combination mode and the second symbol combination mode, so the interest of the symbol combination mode (small hitting pattern) Can be increased.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the symbol combination mode further has a third symbol combination mode (third small hit symbol) corresponding to the third special result (third small hit) of the special results. If the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is the third special result, the number of times the variable winning device is opened is M times (three times) the first number, the third number (three times). A special game state (second special game state) is generated, and the display control unit (production control device 300) determines that the game having the first special result is M consecutive times based on the determination result of the advance determination unit. In this case, the replacement effect (small hit symbol replacement effect) can be executed, and in the replacement effect, the third symbol combination mode is displayed once instead of the control of displaying the first symbol combination mode M times. It can be configured to perform control (see FIG. 60(a)).

With this configuration, not only when the game with the first special result continues N times, but also when the game with the first special result continues M times, the opening of the symbol combination mode before and after the replacement Without changing the number of times, it is possible to combine the display of the symbol combination mode a plurality of times into one display of the symbol combination mode, so that the interest of the symbol combination mode (small hitting pattern) can be enhanced.
Note that M times is not limited to three times, and can be appropriately changed as long as it is different from N times and a plurality of times. That is, the third number of times is not limited to three times, but can be changed as appropriate as long as it is different from the second number of times and a plurality of times.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 58 and FIG. 59, the small hit symbol replacement effect is executed in the first specific game state ST2 (small hit RUSH mode), but of course, game states other than the first specific game state ST2. Even in, it is possible to execute the small hit symbol replacement effect.
Further, the distribution probability of the small hit type when the small hit is won is not limited to the distribution probability shown in FIG. 55(a), and can be changed appropriately.
Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit is not provided in the special figure 1 but is provided only in the special figure 2, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the small hit is provided in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Is also good.

Further, the small hit type is not limited to three types and can be appropriately changed as long as it is a plurality of types, and may be two types, for example.
Specifically, there may be two types of small hits, a first small hit and a second small hit, and in that case (that is, N=2 and there is no third special result). , The steps C406 and C410 to C412 of FIG. 60A are omitted. Further, the small hit type may be two kinds of the first small hit and the third small hit, and in that case (that is, N=3 and there is no third special result), Steps C407 to C409 of 60(a) are omitted.

Further, the small hit type may be four or more types. Specifically, for example, when the special figure variation display game that is the first small hit is continuous twice, for example, as shown in FIG. 61A, the first small hit symbol is released twice. Perform a small hit symbol replacement effect to replace with the second small hit symbol that indicates that there is (control to display the second small hit symbol once instead of the control to display the first small hit symbol twice), When the special figure variation display game which is the first small hit is repeated three times, for example, as shown in FIG. 61(b), the first small hit symbol is the third small indicating that the number of times of opening is three times. A small winning symbol replacement effect that replaces the winning symbol is executed (instead of the control of displaying the first small winning symbol three times, the control of displaying the third small winning symbol once is performed), which is the first small bonus. When the figure variation display game continues four times, for example, as shown in FIG. 62(a), the first small hit symbol is replaced with the fourth small hit symbol which indicates that the number of times of opening is four. The replacement effect is executed (instead of the control of displaying the first small hit symbol four times, the control of displaying the fourth small hit symbol once is performed), and the special symbol variation display game for the first small hit is five times. When continuous, for example, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the first small hit symbol design is executed to replace the first small hit symbol with the fifth small hit symbol indicating that the number of times of opening is five ( Instead of the control of displaying the first small hitting pattern five times, the control of displaying the fifth small hitting pattern once may be performed).
In the example shown in FIG. 62(a), the result of the fifth game is off, but the result of the fifth game is other than the first small hit (when the result of the fifth game is undecided). That is, the case where the starting memory corresponding to the fifth game is not stored is included).

<Small variation 1 of small hit symbol replacement production>
Although the small-hit symbol replacement effect can be executed when the special figure variation display game that is the first small-hit continues, the present invention is not limited to this. In other words, if the number of open times indicated by the small hit pattern before replacement is the same as the number of open times indicated by the small hit pattern after replacement, if the results of consecutive special figure variable display games are different small hit types In addition, the small hit symbol replacement effect may be executable.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 62(c), when the special figure variation display game which is the first small hit and the special figure variation display game which is the second small hit are consecutive, the first small variation The hit design and the second small hit design are replaced with the third small hit design to execute a small hit design replacement effect (control for displaying the first small hit design once and the second small hit design once. Alternatively, the third small hit symbol may be displayed once).
In the example shown in FIG. 62(c), the result of the first game (current special map change display game) is the first small hit, and the second game (next special map change display game). Although the result of No. 2 is the second small hit, the opposite may be possible. That is, in the case where the result of the first game (this time special figure variation display game) is the second small hit, and the second game (the result of the next special figure variation display game) is the first small hit, The second small hit pattern and the first small hit symbol may be replaced with the third small hit symbol to execute a small hit symbol replacement effect.

<Variation 2 of small hit symbol replacement production>
Also, if the number of open times indicated by the small hit pattern before replacement is the same as the number of open times indicated by the small hit pattern after replacement, if the special figure variation display game for small hits does not continue, the small hit The symbol replacement effect may be executable.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 63(a) to 63(d), when there is a special figure variation display game that is out of place between the special figure variation display games that are small hits, a small hit symbol difference Alternate production may be executed. In that case, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the decorative special figure game display portion 42a when the variation of the special figure variation display game which is out of order is stopped, the game result may be erroneously recognized. As described above, during execution of the small hit symbol replacement effect, it is preferable to display an image of hiding the small hit symbol on the decorative special symbol game display portion 42a when the variation of the special symbol variable display game, which is an outlier, is stopped.

64 is an example of a display on the display device 41 when the small hit symbol replacement effect shown in FIG. 63(a) is executed.
When the execution of the small hit symbol symbol replacement effect is set (the second small hit symbol symbol replacement flag is set) and the first special symbol fluctuation display game starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 64(a), a decorative special symbol game On the display unit 42a and the small pattern variation display unit 42b, the variation display of the decoration identification information in the high-speed variation mode is started. Since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the first small hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 64(b), the first small hit symbol (“123”) is displayed in the small symbol variation display section 42b. On the other hand, the second special hit symbol (“234”) is stopped and displayed on the decorative special figure game display portion 42a while being stopped and displayed.

Next, a special game state based on the first small hit (a second special game state in which the number of times of opening is one) occurs, and for example, as shown in FIG. 64(c), every time a game ball wins the big winning opening. The value of the prize ball number display portion 42f is updated by +15. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 64(d), during the ending time of the second special game state, the value of the award ball number display portion 42f is added to the value of the cumulative award ball number display portion 42e.

Next, when the next special figure variation display game starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 64(e), the high speed variation display of the ornament identification information is started in the small symbol variation display section 42b, while the decoration special figure game display section is started. At 42a, the temporary stop display of the second small hit symbol is started. Then, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is a failure, for example, as shown in FIG. 64(f), the deviation symbol (here, “634”) is stopped and displayed in the small symbol variation display portion 42b. On the other hand, in the decorative special figure game display portion 42a, the second small hit symbol (“234”) is stopped and displayed, and the cut-in image G1 is displayed in front of the second small hit symbol.

Next, when the next special figure variation display game starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 64(g), the cut-in image G1 disappears, and high-speed variation display of decoration identification information is started in the small symbol variation display section 42b. On the other hand, the temporary stop display of the second small hit symbol is started on the decorative special figure game display portion 42a. Since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the first small hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 64(h), the first small hit symbol (“123”) is displayed in the small symbol variation display section 42b. On the other hand, the second special hit symbol (“234”) is stopped and displayed on the decorative special figure game display portion 42a while being stopped and displayed.
Of course, the image for hiding the small hitting pattern is not limited to the cut-in image G1 and can be changed as appropriate. Further, instead of displaying the image for hiding the small hit symbol design, even when the small hit symbol symbol replacement effect is being executed, when the variation of the special symbol variation display game that is off is stopped, the decorative special symbol game display portion 42a is displayed. It is also possible to stop and display the falling pattern.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the small hit symbol replacement effect of the above-described embodiment, modification 1 and modification 2 executes the game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the start condition, A special game state (first special game state, second special game state) in which the variable prize device (first special variable prize device 38, second special variable prize device 39) is opened when the result of the game becomes a special result ) Is a gaming machine capable of generating a game, and the display device 41 displays a pre-determination means (game control device 100) for determining the game before the game is executed and a symbol combination mode corresponding to the result of the game. And a display control means (effect control device 300) for displaying, and in the symbol combination mode, a plurality of types of symbol combination modes (eg, first small hit symbol pattern) showing different numbers of times of opening as the number of times of opening of the variable winning device. , There is a second small hit symbol, a third small hit symbol), the display control means, based on the determination result of the advance determination means, when the special game state (second special game state) is determined to occur multiple times, It is possible to execute a replacement effect (small hitting symbol replacement effect) for replacing the symbol combination mode displayed on the display device 41, and in the replacement effect, each time the game is executed, the symbol combination mode corresponding to the result of the game. Instead of the control for displaying, the control for displaying a symbol combination mode showing the total number of times of opening the variable winning a prize device in the special game state a plurality of times over a plurality of games is configured.
Therefore, without changing the number of times the symbol combination mode shows before and after replacement, it is possible to combine the display of a plurality of symbol combination modes into one display of the symbol combination mode, and thus the symbol combination mode (small hit pattern) The interest of can be raised.

<Small variation 3 of small hit symbol replacement production>
The small hit symbol replacement effect of the above-described embodiment, the modified example 1, and the modified example 2 shows that the small hit symbol indicating that the number of times of opening is a predetermined number, the number of times of opening is a number larger than the predetermined number of times. The effect is to replace with a small hit pattern, but the reverse is also possible. In other words, if the number of releases shown by the small hit pattern before replacement and the number of releases shown by the small hit pattern after replacement are the same, the number of releases is a predetermined number as the small hit symbol replacement effect. It may be possible to execute an effect in which the small hit symbol shown is replaced with a small hit symbol indicating that the number of releases is less than the predetermined number of times.

Specifically, for example, instead of (or in addition to) the small hit symbol replacement effect determination processing shown in FIG. 60(a), the small hit symbol replacement effect determination processing shown in FIG. 65(a) may be performed. good.
In the small hit symbol replacement effect determination processing shown in FIG. 65(a), first, a lottery for the small hit symbol replacement effect is performed (step C421), and when the lottery for the small hit symbol replacement effect is lost (step C422; In N), the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process ends.
On the other hand, when winning the lottery for the small hit symbol replacement effect (step C422; Y), it is determined whether the stop symbol set in the stop symbol setting process (step C392) is the second small hit symbol (step). C423).

If the stop symbol set in the stop symbol setting process is the second small hit symbol (step C423; Y), that is, if the result of the special symbol variation display game this time is the second small hit symbol, the stop symbol setting process The stop symbol (second small hit symbol) set in step 1 is replaced with the first small hit symbol (step C424), and the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process ends.
On the other hand, if the stop symbol set in the stop symbol setting process is not the second small hit symbol (step C423; N), is the stop symbol set in the stop symbol setting process (step C392) the third small hit symbol? Is determined (step C425).

When the stop symbol set in the stop symbol setting process is not the third small hit symbol design (step C425; N), the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process is ended.
On the other hand, if the stop symbol set in the stop symbol setting process is the third small hit symbol (step C435; Y), that is, if the result of the special symbol variation display game this time is the third small hit symbol, the stop symbol The stop symbol (third small hit symbol) set in the setting process is replaced with the first small hit symbol (step C426), and the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process is ended.

65(b) to (g) show an example of a display on the display device 41 in the case of executing a small hit symbol replacement effect of replacing the second small hit symbol with the first small hit symbol.
When the special figure variation display game that is the second small hit starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 65(b), in the high speed variation mode of the ornament identification information in the ornament special figure game display section 42a and the small symbol variation display section 42b. The variable display is started. Then, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the second small hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 65(c), the second small hit symbol (“234”) is displayed in the small symbol variation display section 42b. On the other hand, the first small hit symbol (“123”) is stopped and displayed on the decorative special figure game display portion 42a while being stopped and displayed. That is, also in the small hit symbol replacement effect of this modified example, only the small hit symbol displayed on the decorative special figure game display portion 42a is replaced, and the small hit symbol displayed on the small symbol variation display portion 42b is not replaced. It is like this.

Next, when the special game state based on the second small hit (the second special game state in which the number of times of opening is two) occurs and the first possible opening time starts, for example, as shown in FIG. Each time a game ball is won in the winning hole, the value of the prize ball number display portion 42f is updated by +15. Thereafter, during the interval time between the first opening and the second opening, for example, as shown in FIG. 65(e), after the decoration identification information is displayed on the decoration special figure game display section 42a at high speed, As shown in FIG. 65(f), the first small hit symbol (“123”) is stopped and displayed on the decorative special figure game display portion 42a. Then, when the second openable time starts, as shown in, for example, FIG. 65(g), the value of the prize ball number display portion 42f is updated by +15 every time a game ball is won in the special winning opening. During the ending time of the 2 special game state, the value of the award ball number display portion 42f is added to the value of the cumulative award ball number display portion 42e.

That is, in the small hit symbol replacement effect in which the second small hit symbol is replaced with the first small hit symbol, when the fluctuation of the special symbol fluctuation display game in which the result is the second small hit is stopped, the second small symbol fluctuation display portion 42b While the small hit symbol (“234”) is stopped and displayed, the first small hit symbol (“123”) is stopped and displayed in the decorative special drawing game display portion 42a. Then, during the interval time between the first opening and the second opening in the special game state based on the second small hit (the second special game state in which the number of times of opening is two), the decoration special figure game display portion 42a. In, the first small hit symbol (“123”) is stopped and displayed after the decoration identification information is displayed at high speed.
Further, in the small hit symbol replacement effect of replacing the third small hit symbol with the first small hit symbol, when the variation of the special symbol fluctuation display game in which the result is the third small hit is stopped, the third small symbol fluctuation display section 42b displays the third symbol. While the small hit symbol (“345”) is stopped and displayed, the first small hit symbol (“123”) is stopped and displayed in the decorative special drawing game display portion 42a. Then, in the special game state based on the third small hit (the second special game state in which the number of times of opening is three), during the interval time between the first opening and the second opening, the second opening and the third opening. During the interval time between the opening of the above, the first small hit symbol (“123”) is stopped and displayed after the decoration identification information is displayed at high speed on the decoration special figure game display portion 42a.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the small hit symbol replacement effect of the modified example 3 executes the game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the start condition, and the result of the game is the special result. With a gaming machine that can generate a special game state (first special game state, second special game state) that opens the variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) when There is a display control means (effect control device 300) for displaying the symbol combination mode corresponding to the result of the game on the display device 41, and the symbol combination mode includes the first special result (first small result) of the special results. The first symbol combination mode (first small hit pattern) corresponding to the (hit) and the second special result mode (second small hit) of the special result (the second small hit pattern) and , And when the result of the game is the first special result, a special game state (second special game state) in which the number of times of opening the variable winning device becomes the first number (1 time) occurs, and the game When the result of the above is the second special result, the number of times of opening the variable winning device is the second number (two times) which is N times (twice) the first number of times (the second special game state). State) occurs and the display control means can execute a replacement effect (small hit symbol replacement effect) for replacing the symbol combination mode displayed on the display device 41 when the game result is the second special result. Yes, in the replacement effect, the control for displaying the first symbol combination mode N times is performed instead of the control for displaying the second symbol combination mode once (see FIG. 65(a)). ..

That is, the number of releases (the number of releases shown by the display of the second symbol combination mode once) that the symbol combination mode before the replacement shows, and the number of releases (the number of the first symbol combination modes of the plurality of times that the symbol combination mode shows after the replacement) It is possible to execute the replacement effect (small hitting symbol replacement effect) in which display control is performed so that the total number of times of opening indicated by the display is the same. Therefore, it is possible to divide the display of the one symbol combination mode into the display of the plurality of symbol combination modes without changing the number of times the symbol combination mode shows before and after the replacement, so that the symbol combination mode (small hit pattern) The interest of can be raised.
The first number of times is not limited to once, and may be a plurality of times, for example.
Further, N times is not limited to twice, and can be appropriately changed as long as it is multiple times. That is, the second number of times is not limited to two and can be appropriately changed as long as it is a plurality of times.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the small hit symbol replacement effect of the modified example 3, in the symbol combination mode, the third symbol corresponding to the third special result (third small hit) of the special results. If there is a combination mode (third small hit symbol) and the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is the third special result, the number of times the variable prize winning device is opened is M times the first number (three times). ) Which is the third number (three times) of the special game state (second special game state) occurs, and the display control means (production control device 300) makes a difference when the game result is the third special result. A replacement effect (small hit symbol replacement effect) can be executed, and in the replacement effect, control for displaying the first symbol combination mode M times is performed instead of control for displaying the third symbol combination mode once. (See FIG. 65(a)).

With such a configuration, not only when the game result becomes the second special result, but also when the game result becomes the third special result, the number of times of opening indicated by the symbol combination mode is changed before and after the replacement. Without being able to divide the display of the one-time symbol combination mode into the display of the plurality of times of the symbol combination mode, the interest of the symbol combination mode (small hitting pattern) can be enhanced.
Note that M times is not limited to three times, and can be appropriately changed as long as it is different from N times and a plurality of times. That is, the third number of times is not limited to three times, but can be changed as appropriate as long as it is different from the second number of times and a plurality of times.
Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 65(b) to (g), the small hit symbol replacement effect of the modified example 3 is executed in the first specific game state ST2 (small hit RUSH mode), but of course, the first It is possible to execute the small hit symbol replacement effect of the modified example 3 even in a game state other than the specific game state ST2.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the small hit symbol replacement effect of the modified example 3, the display control means (effect control device 300) responds to the probability setting value set by the setting means (game control device 100). With different selection rates, it is possible to select whether or not to execute the replacement effect (small hitting symbol replacement effect).
That is, the small hitting symbol replacement effect of the modified example 3 is also the same as the small hitting symbol replacement effect of the above-described embodiment, the modified example 1 and the modified example 2, and the winning probability of the lottery of the small hitting symbol replacement effect is the present. It can be configured to be different depending on the probability setting value.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest the probability setting value that is currently set by the small hit symbol, so it is possible to enhance the interest of the symbol combination mode (small hit symbol).
It should be noted that the small hit pattern replacement effect of the above embodiment, the small hit symbol replacement effect of the modified example 1, the small hit symbol replacement effect of the modified example 2, and the small hit symbol replacement effect of the modified example 3. Can be applied in appropriate combination.

<Board production device>
FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating an example of the board effect device 44.
For example, as shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 is provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating. The board production device 44 includes a movable member 440 and a drive mechanism (not shown) that operates the movable member 440.
The movable member 440 includes a circular rotator 441, and a part of the rotator 441 is displayed in the display area of the display device 41 by a drive mechanism (not shown), as shown in FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b), for example. It is possible to move between an overlapping initial position and an operating position where the entire rotating body 441 overlaps the display area of the display device 41. Further, the rotating body 441 of the movable member 440 can be rotated by a drive mechanism (not shown), for example, as shown in FIG. 66(c).
A part of the plurality of LEDs included in the board decoration device 46 is provided on the movable member 440. That is, the movable member 440 is provided with a light emitting member, and the movable member 440 is decorated (luminous decoration) by the light emitting member.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66A, for example, the position where a part of the rotating body 441 overlaps the upper end of the display area of the display device 41 is set as the initial position of the movable member 440. However, the initial position can be changed as appropriate.
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66B, for example, the position where the entire rotating body 441 overlaps the central portion of the display area of the display device 41 is set as the operating position of the movable member 440. There is no limitation, and the operation position can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 66(c), the rotating body 441 of the movable member 440 is rotating while the movable member 440 is in the operating position, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotating body 441 rotates. The position of the movable member 440 when performing the operation can be appropriately changed. That is, the rotating body 441 may perform the rotating operation in a state in which the movable member 440 is at a position other than the operating position (for example, the initial position or an intermediate position between the initial position and the operating position). Further, in the example shown in FIG. 66(c), the rotating body 441 rotates in the clockwise direction, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotating body 441 is replaced (or in addition to the clockwise rotating operation). ), counterclockwise rotation may be performed.

<Feature production>
The effect control device 300 can execute an accessory effect in which the movable member 440 is operated. In the present embodiment, the character effect is executed when the character effect lottery is won and the effect button 25 is operated during the operation valid period. Further, in the present embodiment, as a character effect, after the moving operation of the movable member 440 (moving from the initial position to the operating position), the rotating operation of the movable member 440 (the operation of rotating the rotating body 441) is performed. Perform the performance.

Production control device 300, for example, in step C386 or step C389 of the variation production setting process (FIG. 54), executes an operation promotion production that displays an image (operation promotion image G2) that prompts the player to operate production button 25. A role that determines whether or not to perform a character effect when performing an operation promotion effect lottery to determine whether or not to win the operation promotion effect lottery (when it is determined to execute the operation promotion effect) Perform a lottery for product production. That is, at the start of the special figure variation display game, the operation promotion effect lottery and the accessory effect lottery for the special figure variation display game are executed.

When the operation promotion effect lottery is won, the display setting corresponding to the operation promotion effect is performed in step C394 of the fluctuation effect setting process (FIG. 54), and the step C396 of the fluctuation effect setting process (FIG. 54) is performed. , The sound number (the number indicating the type of effect produced by the speakers 19a and 19b) and the decoration number (the number indicating the type of effect produced by the board effect device 44, the board decoration device 46, and the frame decoration device 18) corresponding to the operation promotion effect. Settings are made.
When winning the character effect lottery, in step C394 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54), the display setting corresponding to the character effect effect is performed, and at the same time, step C396 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54). , The sound number (the number indicating the type of effect by the speakers 19a and 19b) and the decoration number (the number indicating the type of effect by the board effect device 44, the board decoration device 46, and the frame decoration device 18) corresponding to the accessory effect. Settings are made.

Characteristic effect lottery for special figure variation display games where the result is a big hit or special figure variation display games where SP reach occurs. A special figure variation display game that does not cause a game or SP reach. The character production lottery for games is a character production lottery for other special figure variation display games (special figure variation display games that result in big hits and special figure variation display games that cause SP reach). It is set to have a higher probability of losing. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to suggest that the expectation of the big hit and the expectation of the SP reach are high by executing the accessory effect.
There is also a case where the accessory production is not executed after the operation promotion production (when the operation promotion production lottery is won but is defeated in the character production production lottery), but the operation promotion production is always executed before the accessory production. R. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to suggest that the accessory effect may be executed by executing the operation promotion effect. That is, by executing the operation promotion effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the accessory effect may be executed.

The character effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. 67 is an example of a timing chart, and FIG. 68 is an example of light emission decoration and display.
When the special figure variation display game that wins the operation promotion effect lottery and the role effect effect lottery starts, and the operation valid period starts (t101), for example, as shown in FIGS. 67(a) and 67(b), the effect control device 300. Outputs a control signal to the display device 41 to display the operation promotion image G2 on the display device 41. For example, as shown in FIG. 68(a), the operation promotion image G2 includes a button image G21 that imitates the effect button 25, a notification image G22 (for example, a time bar image) that notifies the remaining length of the operation valid period, and an effect. This is an image including a designated image G23 (for example, a character image such as "PUSH!" Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 67(a), 67(b) and 68(a), the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is a normal light emitting mode in which the light emitting member is lit in white before the operation effective period starts. Is emitting light.

When the effect button 25 is operated during the operation valid period (t102), the effect control device 300 outputs a control signal to the board effect device 44 to move the movable member 440 (moves from the initial position to the operation position). Operation). As a result, the motor that moves the movable member 440 rotates, and the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the operating position. In the present embodiment, since the stepping motor is used as the motor for moving the movable member 440, when the motor starts rotating, specifically, the non-excitation state (excitation OFF state) is switched to the excitation state (excitation ON state). At times, the movable member 440 slightly moves (the position does not change). That is, the movable member 440 performs a moving operation after performing a preparatory operation for slightly moving at a fixed position, as shown in FIGS. 67(a) and 67(b), for example.

Therefore, since the preparatory operation for performing the moving operation is always executed before the moving operation is performed, there are problems such as annoyance and the appearance of the accessory production is not good.
In addition, before the movement operation is executed, the fact that the movement operation is executed by the preparation operation is always definitely reported. In other words, before the start of the character effect, the preparation operation is definitely notified that the character effect will be executed. Therefore, the expectation that the character effect may be executed is set when the character effect is started. However, there is also a problem that the interest in the production of the character is reduced.

In order to reduce these problems, in the present embodiment, as shown in, for example, FIGS. 67(a) and 67(b), while the movable member 440 is performing the preparatory operation (t102 to t103), the movable member 440 is not changed. The provided light emitting member is turned off and the blackout image G3 is displayed on the display device 41. By turning off the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 while the movable member 440 is performing the preparatory operation, it is possible to attract the player's line of sight to the light emitting portion and deviate from the movable member 440. The preparatory operation of the member 440 becomes difficult to notice. Further, while the movable member 440 is performing the preparatory operation, in addition to turning off the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440, the blackout image G3 is displayed on the display device 41, so that the movable member 440 can be displayed. The color (the color when the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is in the off state) and the background color of the movable member 440 are similar to each other (colors of the same system), and the movable member 440 is surrounded. Since it fits in well, the preparatory operation of the movable member 440 becomes less noticeable.

Specifically, when the effect button 25 is operated (t102), the effect control device 300 causes the board effect device 44 to execute the movement operation of the movable member 440 (the operation of moving from the initial position to the operation position). Is output, a control signal for turning off the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is output to the panel decoration device 46, and a control signal for displaying the blackout image G3 is displayed on the display device 41. Output. As a result, as shown in FIG. 68B, for example, while the movable member 440 is performing the preparatory operation, the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is turned off, and the blackout image G3 is displayed on the display device 41. Is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 68B, the blackout image G3 is displayed on the entire display area of the display device 41, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the preparatory operation of the movable member 440 becomes less conspicuous, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(c), the blackout image is displayed only in the area near the movable member 440 in the initial position in the display area of the display device 41. G3 may be displayed, or, for example, as shown in FIG. 68D, the movable member 440 in the entire initial display area of the display device 41 (or in the display area of the display device 41 at the initial position). An image with a dark background may be displayed.

Then, when the time required for the preparatory operation of the movable member 440 has elapsed (t103), the effect control device 300 causes the panel decoration device 46 to emit a control signal for causing the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 to emit light in a specific light emission mode. Is output, and a control signal for displaying the effect image G4 is output to the display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIG. 68E, for example, while the movable member 440 is moving, the light-emitting member provided on the movable member 440 emits light in a specific light-emission mode and the display is performed. An effect image G4 for highlighting the movable member 440 is displayed on the device 41.
Next, when the time required for the moving operation of the movable member 440 elapses (t105), that is, when the movable member 440 arrives at the operating position, the effect control device 300 outputs a control signal to the board effect device 44 and the movable member 440. Rotation operation (operation of rotating the rotating body 441) is executed.

After that, when it comes to the end timing of the accessory effect (t106), the effect control device 300 outputs a control signal to the board effect device 44 to end the rotation operation of the movable member 440 and the return operation of the movable member 440 ( The operation of moving from the operating position to the initial position) is performed. Further, a control signal is output to the board decoration device 46 to terminate the light emission of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 in the specific light emission mode, and at the same time, a control signal is output to the display device 41 to display the effect image G4. Terminate the display.
In addition, when the effect button 25 is not operated during the operation valid period, it is not necessary to execute the effect (feature effect) that performs the movement operation and the rotation operation, and the movement operation and the movement operation are performed after the operation effective period ends. You may perform the production which performs a rotation operation (feature production).

Here, in the present embodiment, the movement operation and the preparation operation are operations that are executed with a fixed time value, and the rotation operation is an operation that is executed with a variable time value. The time until the end of is determined in advance. Therefore, the execution time of the rotation operation varies depending on the timing at which the effect button 25 is operated. That is, the time required for the preparation operation (t102 to t103) does not change according to the timing at which the effect button 25 is operated, and the time required for the moving operation (t103 to t105) is also set at the timing at which the effect button 25 is operated. The effect button 25 does not change according to the timing at which the effect button 25 is operated, and the time (t101 to t106) from the start of the operation effective period to the end of the accessory effect does not change. The farther the operation timing is from the end point (t104) of the operation valid period, the longer the execution time (t105 to t106) of the rotation operation is.

Specifically, for example, the time (t102a to t103a) required for the preparatory operation in FIG. 67A is the same as the time (t102b to t103b) required for the preparatory operation in FIG. 67B, and FIG. 67. The time required for the movement operation (t103a to t105a) is the same as the time required for the movement operation (t103b to t105b) in FIG. 67(b), and the effect production from the start of the operation effective period in FIG. 67(a). The time (t101 to t106) until the end of is the same as the time (t101 to t106) from the start of the operation valid period to the end of the character effect in FIG. 67(b). Since the operation timing (t102a) in FIG. 67(a) is farther from the end point (t104) of the operation valid period than the operation timing (t102b) in FIG. 67(b), the rotation operation of FIG. The execution time (t105a to t106) is longer than the execution time (t105b to t106) of the rotation operation in FIG. 67(b).

In the present embodiment, when the movable member 440 starts the returning operation, the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is configured to end the light emission in the specific light emission mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, while the movable member 440 is performing the returning operation, light emission in the specific light emission mode is continued, and when the returning operation of the movable member 440 ends (when the movable member 440 reaches the initial position), It is also possible to finish the light emission in the specific light emission mode.
Further, in the present embodiment, when the movable member 440 starts the returning operation, the display of the effect image G4 is ended, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, while the movable member 440 is performing the return operation, the effect image G4 is continuously displayed, and when the return operation of the movable member 440 ends (when the movable member 440 reaches the initial position), the effect is displayed. It is also possible to configure the display of the image G4 to end.

Further, in the present embodiment, the light emitting mode of lighting in white is the normal light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440, but the light emitting mode is not limited to this, and the normal light emitting mode can be appropriately changed.
Further, in the present embodiment, the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is configured to emit light in the normal light emitting mode before the operation effective period starts, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is the same before the operation valid period starts and before the operation valid period starts until the operation of the effect button 25 is detected. It can be different or different. For example, the light may be turned off before the operation valid period starts and light may be emitted after the operation valid period starts.

Further, in the present embodiment, the light emitting mode of lighting in red is the specific light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific light emitting mode can be appropriately changed.
Further, in the present embodiment, the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is configured to emit light in a specific light emitting mode during the moving operation and the rotating operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the light emission mode during the movement operation and the rotation operation may be the normal light emission mode (that is, the same light emission mode as the light emission mode before extinguished). Further, the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 may be the same or different between the moving operation and the rotating operation.

Further, in the present embodiment, a part of the movable member 440 in the initial position overlaps with the upper part of the center case 40 as shown in FIG. 66(a), for example. Therefore, while the movable member 440 is performing the preparatory operation, the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is turned off, and the blackout image G3 (or an image with a dark background) is displayed on the display device 41. In addition, the LED provided on the upper part of the center case 40 (that is, the light emitting member provided around the movable member 440 at the initial position) may be turned off. With this configuration, the preparatory operation of the movable member 440 can be made less noticeable.

Further, in the present embodiment, the position where a part of the movable member 440 overlaps the display area of the display device 41 is set as the initial position. The movable member 440 may not be entirely overlapped with the display area of the display device 41.
Further, for example, when all the movable members 440 in the initial position do not overlap the display area of the display device 41, the blackout image G3 (or the blackout image G3 (or Instead of displaying an image with a dark background, the light emitting member provided around the movable member 440 at the initial position may be turned off. With this configuration, the preparatory operation of the movable member 440 can be made inconspicuous.

Further, in the present embodiment, the blackout image G3 (or the image with a dark background) is displayed on the display device 41 while the movable member 440 is performing the preparation operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 69, the operation promoting image G2 may be displayed while the movable member 440 is performing the preparation operation. With such a configuration, the player's line of sight can be attracted to the operation promotion image G2 and deviated from the movable member 440, so that the preparation operation of the movable member 440 becomes difficult to be noticed. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 69, the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is turned off while the movable member 440 is performing the preparatory operation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the display device 41. It is also possible to emit light in a light emission mode in which the color is of the same system as the background color of the operation promotion image G2 continuously displayed in FIG.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that can perform an effect using the movable member 440 in connection with a game, and the movable member 440 has a predetermined operation (moving operation). In addition, the movable member 440 can emit light, and the movable member 440 emits light in a first period (t103-) in which the movable member 440 performs a predetermined operation. t105) and the second period (t102 to t103) immediately before the first period are configured to be different (see FIGS. 67(a) and 67(b)).

That is, the light emitting mode of the movable member 440 is configured to be different between the first period in which the predetermined operation (moving operation) is performed and the second period in which the preparatory operation for performing the predetermined operation is performed. Therefore, as the light emission mode in the first period, a light emission mode that highlights the operation (moving operation) of the movable member 440 (for example, a specific light emission mode different from the normal light emission mode) is selected, or the light emission mode in the second period. As a result, it is possible to select a light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode in which the light is turned off) so that the operation (preparation operation) of the movable member 440 is not conspicuous. Can be increased.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the light emission mode in which the light is turned off is the light emission mode in the second period, but the light emission mode is not limited to this. The light emission mode in the second period may be, for example, a light emission mode in which light is emitted with a brightness equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold. By causing the light-emitting member provided on the movable member 440 to emit light with a brightness (for example, maximum brightness) equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value, the movable member 440 shines brightly and the player's line of sight can be deviated from the movable member 440. As a result, the preparation operation of the movable member 440 is less likely to be noticed, and the attraction of the effect using the movable member 440 can be enhanced.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes the display device 41, the movable member 440 is operable in front of the display device 41 (see FIGS. 66A and 66B), and the display of the display device 41 is displayed. The aspect can be configured to be different in the first period (t103 to t105) and the second period (t102 to t103) (see FIGS. 67A and 67B).

That is, the display mode of the display device 41 can be configured to be different between the first period in which the predetermined operation (moving operation) is performed and the second period in which the preparatory operation for performing the predetermined operation is performed. With this configuration, as a display mode in the first period, a display mode that makes the operation (moving operation) of the movable member 440 noticeable (for example, a display that displays the effect image G4 for emphasizing the movable member 440). Mode) or as a display mode in the second period, a display mode (for example, a display mode in which the blackout image G3 is displayed) that does not make the operation (preparation operation) of the movable member 440 noticeable. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect using the movable member 440.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of performing an effect using the movable member 440 in association with a game, and the movable member 440 can perform a predetermined operation (moving operation). In addition, the movable member is capable of emitting light, and the movable member emits light in a first period (t103 to t105) in which the movable member 440 performs a predetermined operation and a second period (t102 to t103) immediately before the first period. ), and the color of the movable member 440 and the display color of the display device 41 in the second period may be of the same system (FIGS. 68(b) and 68(c)). , (D)).
With this configuration, since the movable member 440 is adapted to the surroundings, the preparatory operation of the movable member 440 is less noticeable, and the attraction of the effect using the movable member 440 can be enhanced.

As described above, the light emission mode in the second period is not limited to the light emission mode in which the light is turned off, and can be changed as appropriate. That is, the color of the movable member 440 in the second period can be changed as appropriate.
Further, in the present embodiment, the blackout image G3 (or the image with a dark background) is displayed on the display device 41 during the second period (the period during which the movable member 440 is performing the preparatory operation). Not limited. That is, the display color of the display device 41 in the second period is not limited to black (or dark color), and can be appropriately changed according to the color of the movable member 440 in the second period. For example, in the case where the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is caused to emit white light at a luminance equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold (for example, maximum luminance) in the second period, the display color of the display device 41 in the second period is white ( Alternatively, when the movable member 440 is made to have a bright color), the movable member 440 blends into the surroundings, so that the preparatory operation of the movable member 440 becomes less noticeable, and the attraction of the effect using the movable member 440 can be enhanced.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of performing an effect using the movable member 440 in association with a game, and the movable member 440 has a predetermined operation (moving operation and rotating operation). The movable member 440 emits light, and the movable member 440 emits light in a first period (t103-) during which the movable member 440 performs a predetermined operation. t106) and the second period (t106-) immediately after the first period can be configured to be different.
Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the movable member 440 starts the returning operation (t106), the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 ends the light emission in the specific light emission mode. ..

Therefore, the light emitting mode of the movable member 440 can be configured to be different between the first period in which the predetermined operation (moving operation and rotating operation) is performed and the second period in which the returning operation is performed. With such a configuration, as the light emission mode in the first period, a light emission mode (for example, a specific light emission mode different from the normal light emission mode) that highlights the operation (moving operation and rotation operation) of the movable member 440 is selected. Alternatively, as the light emission mode in the second period, a light emission mode that does not make the operation (return operation) of the movable member 440 noticeable (for example, a light emission mode different from the specific light emission mode (for example, a normal light emission mode or an extinguished state). Since it is possible to select the desired light emission mode)), it is possible to enhance the interest of the production using the movable member 440.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of performing an effect using the movable member 440 in association with a game, and the movable member 440 can perform a predetermined operation (moving operation). In addition, the movable member 440 can emit light, and the light emitting mode of the movable member 440 (the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440) is the first period (t103 to t105) in which the movable member 440 performs a predetermined operation. , The second period (t102 to t103) immediately before the first period, and the color of the movable member 440 and the color of the light emitting member provided around the movable member 440 in the second period are different. It can be configured to have similar colors.
Specifically, in the present embodiment, in addition to turning off the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 while the movable member 440 is performing the preparatory operation, the LED provided on the upper portion of the center case 40 is used. (That is, the light emitting member provided around the movable member 440 in the initial position) can be turned off.
With this configuration, since the movable member 440 is adapted to the surroundings, the preparatory operation of the movable member 440 is less noticeable, and the attraction of the effect using the movable member 440 can be enhanced.

Further, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment is a game machine capable of executing an effect using the movable member 440 in connection with a game, and has an operation means (effect button 25) operable by the player. And a display device 41 that displays an operation prompting image G2 that prompts the user to operate the operation means, and the movable member 440 is set to a predetermined value when the operation means is operated during an operation effective period during which the operation of the operation means is effective. The operation (moving operation) is performed, and the display device 41 can be configured to continue to display the operation promotion image G2 even after the operation means is operated until the movable member 440 starts the predetermined operation. (See Figure 69).

That is, the operation promoting image G2 can be displayed continuously until the preparatory operation for performing the predetermined operation (moving operation) is completed. With this configuration, the player's line of sight can be attracted to the operation promotion image G2 and deviated from the movable member 440, so that the preparatory operation of the movable member 440 becomes difficult to notice and the movable member 440 is used. It is possible to enhance the interest of the directed production.
The operation means is not limited to the effect button 25, and may be the touch panel 29, for example.

Further, the image displayed on the display device 41 for diverting the player's line of sight from the movable member 440 is not limited to the operation promotion image G2, and can be changed as appropriate.
In addition, instead of (or in addition to) displaying an image for diverting the line of sight of the player from the movable member 440 on the display device 41 while the movable member 440 is performing the preparation operation, the movable member 440 is prepared. During a period of operation, a light emitting member other than the light emitting member provided around the movable member 440 in the initial position (for example, an LED arranged in a region far from the movable member 440 in the initial position) is caused to emit light. It may be configured to. With such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's line of sight to the light emitting portion and deviate from the movable member 440, so that the preparatory operation of the movable member 440 becomes difficult to notice and the effect using the movable member 440 is produced. The interest of can be raised.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of performing a motion effect using the movable member 440 in association with a game, and the movable member 440 is a motion effect (moving motion and rotating motion). The advance notice action (preparatory action) is performed immediately before the character effect), and the execution time of the advance notice action is constant and the movement of the movable member 440 during the advance notice action is constant regardless of the effect mode of the action effect. (See FIGS. 67(a) and 67(b)).
Specifically, in the present embodiment, the advance notice operation (preparatory operation) is a rattling operation (an operation of slightly moving at a fixed position) that occurs with the start of the excitation of the stepping motor, and therefore, the effect time of the operation effect (t103 to t106). Regardless of the length, the execution time (t102 to t103) of the advance notice operation is constant, and the movement of the movable member 440 during the advance notice operation is constant.

Therefore, an effect mode of a concealing effect (for example, an effect of turning off the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440, an effect of displaying the blackout image G3 on the display device 41, etc.) that conceals the advance notice operation (preparatory operation), Since it is not necessary to change it according to the effect mode of the motion effect, it is possible to reduce the processing load when performing the effect using the movable member 440.
That is, when the execution time of the advance notice operation is different depending on the effect mode of the action effect, or when the movement of the movable member 440 during the advance notice action is different depending on the effect mode of the action effect, the concealment effect of the concealment effect is changed according to the effect mode of the action effect. Since it is necessary to execute a process for selecting a production mode (production time, production range, etc.), the processing load increases accordingly. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the execution time of the notice motion and the movement of the movable member 440 during the notice motion are constant regardless of the effect form of the motion effect, and therefore, the process of selecting the effect mode of the concealment effect is performed. You don't have to do it.

In the present embodiment, the execution time of the advance notice operation and the movement of the movable member 440 during the advance notice operation are constant regardless of the production time of the action effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the performance mode of the motion effect is not limited to the effect time of the motion effect, and may be, for example, the type of motion performed in the motion effect. Specifically, for example, when a character effect that performs a moving operation and a rotating operation and a character effect that performs a moving operation (a rotating operation is not performed) can be executed as the motion effects, in the motion effects, The execution time of the advance notice operation and the movement of the movable member 440 during the advance notice operation are constant regardless of the type of the operation performed.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect time (t103 to t106) of the operation effect can be configured to be changeable (see FIGS. 67(a) and 67(b)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to end the motion effect at a predetermined end timing regardless of the start timing of the motion effect (for example, the operation timing of the effect button 25). Therefore, the movable member 440 is used. It is possible to increase the interest of the directed production.

In the present embodiment, the effect time of the action effect is changed in order to end the action effect at a predetermined end timing, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the longer the production time of the action effect, the higher the expectation of a big hit of the action effect can be configured. Accordingly, it is possible to suggest predetermined information (for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit) according to the effect time of the motion effect, and thus it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect using the movable member 440.
In addition, since it is possible to widen the range of the motion effect by making it possible to change the effect time of the motion effect, it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect using the movable member 440. Further, by making it possible to change the effect time of the motion effect, it is possible to change the effect time of other effects (for example, display effects) that are executed together with the motion effect, so it is possible to broaden the range of the other effects. Becomes Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of not only the motion effect but also other effects executed together with the motion effect.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with an effect means other than the movable member 440, and the effect time (t103 to t106) of the operation effect can be changed according to the effect mode of the effect using the effect means. (See FIGS. 67(a) and 67(b)).
Specifically, in the present embodiment, the effect time (t103 to t106) of the motion effect is the effect mode (effect time) of the effect (operation promotion effect) using the display device 41 and the effect button 25, that is, the effect button 25. It can be changed according to the operation timing of.
With this configuration, since it is possible to execute an effect related to another effect (an effect using an effect means other than the movable member 440) as the motion effect, it is possible to perform an effect using the movable member 440. The interest can be increased.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the execution time of the rotation operation is changed according to the operation timing of the effect button 25, out of the effect time of the operation effect (the accessory effect that performs the moving operation and the rotating operation). , But is not limited to this. For example, the execution time of the movement operation may be changed according to the operation timing of the effect button 25, or both the execution time of the movement operation and the execution time of the rotation operation may be changed according to the operation timing of the effect button 25. You may let it be done.
Further, in the present embodiment, the motion effect is executed after the operation promotion effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation effect may be executed without executing the operation promotion effect. .. That is, the motion effect may be executed in association with other effects, or may be executed without being associated with other effects.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect time of the motion effect is changed according to the operation timing of the effect button 25, but the invention is not limited to this, and, for example, effects other than the motion effect (other than that performed before the motion effect) The effect time of the action effect may be changed according to the type of effect, other effect performed during the effect effect, and other effect performed after the effect effect). Specifically, for example, the action effect may be performed during the execution of the special figure variation display game in which the reach occurs, and the effect time of the action effect may be increased as the jackpot expectation degree of the reach effect is higher. Further, in addition to the normal pattern in which the motion effect having a longer effect time is selected as the jackpot expectation of the reach effect is higher, the effect time is the highest when the reach effect is the reach effect having the lowest expectation of a big hit (N reach). You may make it provide the contradiction pattern (heat pattern) in which a long action production is selected.

Further, the motion effect is not limited to the effect of performing the moving operation (the operation of moving the movable member 440 from the initial position to the operation position) and the rotating operation (the operation of rotating the rotating body 441). The motion effect may be, for example, an effect of performing a moving operation (no rotating operation is performed), an effect of performing a rotating operation (not performing a moving operation), or other than the moving operation and the rotating operation. It may be a production for performing the operation of.
Further, the operation (predetermined operation) executed immediately after the preparatory operation (advance notification operation) is not limited to the operation of moving the movable member 440 from the initial position to the operation position. That is, the operation performed immediately after the preparatory operation may be an operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to another position (for example, an operating position), or an operation in which the rotating body 441 rotates. It may be good or any other operation.

<Variation 1 of character production>
For example, as shown in FIG. 70( a ), the effect control device 300 uses the movable member 440 from the initial position (eg, the position shown in FIG. 66( a )) to the operation position (eg, as shown in FIG. 70( a )) as an accessory effect for moving the movable member 440. 66B) and a second accessory effect in which the movable member 440 moves from an initial position to an intermediate position (a position between the initial position and the operating position). It may be feasible. The intermediate position may be a position where the entire movable member 440 overlaps the display area of the display device 41, or a position where a part of the movable member 440 overlaps the display area of the display device 41.
In the present modification, step C386 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 54) (lottery of notice that appears during first half variation) and step C389 of variation effect setting process (FIG. 54) (lottery of notice that appears during second half variation). ) Both, perform a lottery production lottery. Then, when winning the character production lottery in step C386, the character production is executed during the first half variation, and when winning the character production lottery in step C389, character production during the second half variation. To execute.

Specifically, the effect control device 300, in step C386 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54), performs a character effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute a character effect, and wins the character effect lottery. In the case (when it is decided to execute the character effect during the first half change), the effect mode distribution table is referred to and the character effect executed during the first half change is the first character effect. 2 A production mode selection lottery for deciding whether or not to make a character effect is performed.
Further, the effect control device 300, in step C389 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54), performs a character effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute a character effect, and when the character effect lottery is won (second half). If it is decided to execute the character effect during the change), the effect mode distribution table is referred to, and the character effect executed during the latter half of the change is the first character effect or the second character effect. A production mode selection lottery for deciding whether to make a production is performed.

When the first character effect is selected in the effect mode selection lottery, the display setting corresponding to the first character effect is performed in step C394 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54), and the variable effect is generated. In step C396 of the setting process (FIG. 54), the sound number (the number indicating the type of effect produced by the speakers 19a and 19b) and the decoration number (the board effect device 44, the board decoration device 46, and the frame decoration) corresponding to the first accessory effect. The number indicating the type of effect produced by the device 18 is set.
When the second character effect is selected in the effect mode selection lottery, in step C394 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54), the display setting corresponding to the second character effect is performed and the variable effect is selected. In step C396 of the setting process (FIG. 54), the sound number (the number indicating the type of effect produced by the speakers 19a and 19b) and the decoration number (the board effect device 44, the board decoration device 46, and the frame decoration) corresponding to the second accessory effect. The number indicating the type of effect produced by the device 18 is set.

FIG. 70(b) shows an example of the effect mode distribution table that is referred to when performing the effect mode selection lottery.
For example, as shown in FIG. 70(b), regardless of the result of the special figure variation display game, the ratio of executing the first character effect during the first half variation (the first character effect is selected in the effect mode selection lottery in step C386). The probability of being selected) is lower than the ratio of executing the second character effect during the first half variation (the probability of selecting the second character effect in the effect mode selection lottery in step C386). Therefore, in the present modification, when the movable member 440 moves during the first-half fluctuation, it is more likely that the movable member 440 does not move to the operating position than the movable member 440 moves to the operating position. Many.

If the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment (other than the big hit), the character effect is not executed during the latter half variation. That is, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the probability of winning the character effect lottery in step C389 is set to other than 0% (0%<winning probability<100%). When the displayed game is out (other than the big hit), the probability of winning the character effect lottery of C389 is set to 0%. Therefore, in the present modification, the effect production is executed during the latter half variation only when the result is a big hit, and therefore, the large member confirmation is suggested by the movement of the movable member 440 during the latter half variation. You can

Furthermore, the ratio of executing the first character effect during the latter half fluctuation (the probability that the first character effect is selected in the effect mode selection lottery in step C389) is the ratio of executing the second character effect during the latter half fluctuation. (Probability that the second accessory effect is selected in the effect mode selection lottery in step C389), and in the case of this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. The ratio of executing the one character effect (probability that the first character effect is selected in the effect mode selection lottery in step C389) is set to 100%. That is, the character effects that appear during the second half change are only the first character effects, and the second character effects are not executed during the second half change. Therefore, in the present modified example, when the movable member 440 moves during the latter half fluctuation, the movable member 440 always moves to the operating position.

The movable member 440 is capable of executing a first movement operation of moving from the initial position to an intermediate position and a second movement operation of moving from the intermediate position to the operating position. In the first character effect, since the movable member 440 performs all the moving operations (first moving operation and second moving operation), when the character effect that appears during the first half fluctuation is only the first character effect. However, the player will know how to move the movable member 440 in the first half of the fluctuation. Therefore, the interest in the movable member 440 cannot be maintained until the latter half of the variation, and the interest in the latter half of the variation decreases. On the other hand, by performing the character effect production only during the second half variation without executing the character effect production during the first half variation, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the second half of the variation, but in the case of such a configuration, Since the movable member 440 does not move during the first half change, the interest in the first half of the change decreases.

Therefore, in the present modification, during the first-half fluctuation, the second member that the movable member 440 performs only a part of the moving operation, rather than the ratio that the first member effect that the movable member 440 performs all the moving operation is executed. It is configured such that the ratio of executing the performance is higher. With this configuration, it is less likely that the player will know how to move the movable member 440 in the first half of the fluctuation, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the latter half of the fluctuation and to move during the first half fluctuation. Since the member 440 may move, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the first half of the fluctuation.

It should be noted that during the first-half fluctuation, the ratio of executing the second accessory effect may be higher than the ratio of executing the first accessory effect, so the first accessory effect is not executed during the first-half fluctuation (during the first-half fluctuation. It is also possible to configure the appearing character effect to be only the second character effect, and even in such a case, both the decrease in interest in the first half of the change and the decrease in interest in the second half of the change can be achieved. Can be suppressed. However, by making it possible to execute not only the second character effect but also the first character effect during the first half change, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the movable member 440 may move to the operation position. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the first half of the fluctuation. Therefore, in this modification, not only the second character effect but also the first character effect can be executed during the first half change.

For example, as shown in FIG. 70(c), in the first accessory effect, the movable member 440 does not stop at the intermediate position after performing the first movement operation of moving from the initial position to the intermediate position. The second movement operation of moving from to the operation position is performed and stopped at the operation position for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 5 seconds). Then, when the first accessory effect is finished (that is, after being stopped at the operating position for a predetermined time), the movable member 440 returns to the initial position. Therefore, in the first character effect, only the intermediate position is passed and the intermediate position is not stopped. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 70(c), the stay time at the intermediate position is “0.1 seconds”. ..
Further, in the second accessory effect, the movable member 440 performs the first movement operation of moving from the initial position to the middle position and stops at the middle position for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). Then, when the second accessory effect is finished (that is, after stopping at the midway position for a predetermined time), the movable member 440 returns to the initial position.

In the present modified example, as shown in FIG. 70C, for example, the time during which the movable member 440 stops at the operating position in the first accessory effect executed during the first half variation (hereinafter referred to as "first half operating position stay time") is set. Although it is set to 3 seconds, the first half operating position stay time is not limited to 3 seconds and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, the time during which the movable member 440 stops at the operating position (hereinafter referred to as "second operating position stay time") is set to 5 seconds in the first accessory effect executed during the latter half operating period. Is not limited to 5 seconds and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, in the second character effect, the time for which the movable member 440 stops at the midway position (hereinafter referred to as “first half midway position stay time”) is set to 3 seconds, but the first half midway position stay time is limited to 3 seconds. Instead, it can be changed appropriately.

During the first half change, more game information is displayed on the display device 41 than during the second half change. Therefore, by shortening the first half operating position stay time (that is, the time during which the movable member 440 overlaps with the central portion of the display area of the display device 41 during the first half fluctuation), it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the visibility of the game information. In this modification, the first half operating position stay time is shortened.
Further, the second half operating position stay time may be the same as the first half operating position stay time. However, in the present modification, the character effect that appears during the latter half of the change (the first character effect that is executed during the latter half of the change) is executed at the time of the big hit notification in the winning notification effect, so the latter half operating position stay time is used. Then, a predetermined effect (for example, an effect in which the movable member 440 and the display device 41 are associated with each other) is often executed. Therefore, by lengthening the second half operation position stay time, the effect of the predetermined effect can be enhanced. Therefore, in the present modification, the second half operation position stay time is made longer than the first half operation position stay time. ..
That is, in this modified example, by making the first half operating position stay time shorter than the latter half operating position stay time, it is possible to suppress the reduction in the visibility of the game information in the first half of the change and to produce a predetermined effect in the second half of the change. It is compatible with the improvement of.

The time required to move from the initial position to the middle position may be the same during the first half fluctuation and during the second half fluctuation, or may be different.
Further, the time required to move from the initial position to the middle position may be the same or different between the first accessory effect and the second accessory effect.
Further, the time required to move from the midway position to the operating position may be the same during the first half fluctuation and during the second half fluctuation, or may be different.

Moreover, since it is sufficient that the ratio of executing the first character effect is higher than the ratio of executing the second character effect during the latter half change, not only the first character effect but also the second character effect during the second half change. May also be configured to be executable. With such a configuration, the time during which the movable member 440 stops at the midway position in the second character effect executed during the latter half variation (hereinafter referred to as the "halfway midway position stay time") can be appropriately selected. For example, by making the second half mid-position stay time longer than the first half mid-position stay time, it is possible to suppress the reduction in the visibility of the game information in the first half of the fluctuation and to perform a predetermined effect in the latter half of the fluctuation (for example, the movable member 440 and the display device). It is possible to achieve both the improvement of the effect of the effect of (41) and the effect of the effect.

Further, in the present modification, while the character effect is being executed, the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is caused to emit light in a light emitting mode in which the movable member 440 is conspicuous, and the character effect is finished. During the period when the movable member 440 returns to the initial position, the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is configured to emit light in a light emitting mode in which the movable member 440 is inconspicuous.
An example of a light emission mode in which the movable member 440 is conspicuous is a light emission mode in which the movable member 440 blinks at a predetermined brightness (for example, maximum brightness).

Further, as an example of the light emitting mode in which the movable member 440 is inconspicuous, a light emitting mode in which the movable member 440 is turned on with a lower luminance than the brightness in the light emitting mode in which the movable member 440 is conspicuous (including a light emitting mode in which the light is turned off). ..
Further, as an example of a light emitting mode in which the movable member 440 is inconspicuous, a light emitting mode in which the color is the same as the display color of the display device 41 is included. In the present modification, the character effect that appears during the latter half of the variation is executed at the time of the big hit notification in the winning notification effect, so that the character member effect ends and the movable member 440 returns to the initial position. During the period, a rainbow-colored background image is often displayed on the display device 41. When a rainbow-colored background image is displayed on the display device 41 during the period in which the movable member 440 is performing the return operation, the light-emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is illuminated in rainbow colors. In this way, the color of the movable member 440 during the returning operation (the emission color of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440) is set to a color similar to the background color of the movable member 440 (same system color). Then, since the movable member 440 is adapted to the surroundings, the returning operation of the movable member 440 becomes less noticeable.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 70(b), the probability that the first character effect that is changing in the first half will be the same whether it is a big hit or a big hit, but it is not limited to this. For example, the probability that the first character effect that is changing in the first half may be higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a big hit, or may be higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a big hit. May be lower. Further, in the case of a big hit, the probability that the first character effect that is changing during the first half may be selected may be 0%. If it is out of sync, the probability that the first character effect that is changing in the first half is selected may be 0%.
Also, in the example shown in FIG. 70(b), the probability that the second character effect that is changing during the first half is the same whether it is a big hit or a big hit, but is not limited to this. For example, the probability that the second character effect that is changing in the first half may be higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a big hit, or may be higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a big hit. May be lower. However, in the case of a big hit, it is preferable that the probability that the second character effect that is changing in the first half is selected is higher than the probability that the first character effect that is changing in the first half is selected. In addition, in the case of being off, it is preferable that the probability that the second character effect that is changing in the first half is selected is higher than the probability that the first character effect that is changing in the first half is selected.
Also, the second character effect may be executed during the latter half variation, and in that case, the probability that the second character effect during the latter half variation is selected is the same in the case of a big hit and in the case of a big hit. In the case of a big hit, it may be higher than in the case of a big hit, or may be lower in the case of a big hit than in the case of a big hit.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the accessory effect of the modified example 1 is a gaming machine capable of executing the effect using the movable member 440 in connection with the game, and the movable member 440 is A first effect (first accessory effect) in which the first operation (first moving operation) and the second operation (second moving operation) are performed, and the movable member 440 performs the first operation and does not perform the second operation. It is possible to execute the second effect (the second character effect), and at the first timing (during the first half change), the ratio of executing the first effect is lower than the ratio of executing the second effect, and the first timing At a second timing (during the latter half variation) different from, the ratio of executing the first effect is configured to be higher than the ratio of executing the second effect (see FIGS. 70A and 70B). ..

Therefore, since it is unlikely that the player grasps the movement of the movable member 440 at the first timing (during the first half change), it is possible to suppress the deterioration of interest at the second timing (during the second half change). Furthermore, since the movable member 440 may move not only at the second timing but also at the first timing, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest at the first timing. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect using the movable member 440.
Further, in addition to the first effect (first accessory effect) that performs both of the first operation and the second operation, a second effect (second accessory effect) in which only one operation is performed is also executed. Since it is possible, the operation frequency of the movable member 440 at the first timing can be increased. Therefore, since it becomes easy to notice a defect (fault, etc.) of the movable member 440, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the effect using the movable member 440 is not executed.

In addition, in this modification, not only the second character effect but also the first character effect can be executed during the first half variation, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the condition that the ratio of executing the first effect (first character effect) is lower than the ratio of executing the second effect (second character effect) at the first timing (during the first half change), for example, Alternatively, the first accessory effect may not be executed during the first-half fluctuation (only the second accessory effect may appear during the first-half fluctuation).
Further, in the present modification, the second accessory effect is not executed during the latter half variation (only the first accessory effect appears during the latter half variation), but the present invention is not limited to this. If the condition that the ratio of executing the first effect (first character effect) is higher than the ratio of executing the second effect (second character effect) at the second timing (changing in the second half), for example, Alternatively, not only the first character effect effect but also the second character effect effect may be executed during the second half change.
Further, in this modification, in the special figure variation display game which does not result in a big hit, it is configured not to execute the accessory effect during the second half variation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, not only when the result is a big hit, Even if the result is something other than a big hit, it may be possible to execute the character effect while the latter half is changing.

Further, the first operation is not limited to the operation of moving the movable member 440 from the initial position to the intermediate position. That is, the first operation may be an operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to another position (for example, an intermediate position), or the movable member 440 moves from the intermediate position to another position (for example, an operational position). The operation may be performed, the operation in which the rotating body 441 is rotated, or any other operation may be performed.
Further, the second movement is not limited to the second movement movement in which the movable member 440 moves from the midway position to the movement position. That is, the second operation may be an operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to another position (for example, an intermediate position), or the movable member 440 moves from the intermediate position to another position (for example, an operational position). It may be a moving operation, a rotating operation of rotating the rotating body 441, or another operation.
Further, the first timing is not limited to the first half variation. Further, the second timing is not limited to the latter half fluctuation. For example, the first timing may be before the SP reach is reached during the latter half fluctuation, and the second timing may be after the SP reach is reached during the latter half fluctuation.

Further, the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the accessory effect of the modified example 1 is a gaming machine capable of executing an operation effect (effect effect) using the movable member 440 in association with the game, and is movable. The member 440 performs a first operation (first moving operation) of moving to a first specific position (midway position) and a second operation (second moving operation) of moving to a second specific position (operating position). It is possible that the movable member 440 stays at the first specific position for the second timing (during the second half change) when the action effect executed at the first timing (during the first half change) is different from the first timing. Is longer than that of the action effect executed in step S4, and the time during which the movable member 440 stays at the second specific position is longer in the action effect performed in the second timing than in the action effect performed at the first timing. Can be configured as shown in FIG. 70(c).

Specifically, in the present modification, the time during which the movable member 440 stays at the midway position is set to 3 seconds in the second character effect that is executed during the first half change, and is executed during the second half change. Since it is set to 0.1 second in the first accessory effect, the action effect executed during the first half variation is longer.
Further, since the movable member 440 does not move to the operation position in the second character effect, the time during which the movable member 440 stays in the operation position in the second character effect is 0 second. Therefore, the time during which the movable member 440 stays in the operating position is set to 0 seconds in the second character effect that is executed during the first half change, and is 5 seconds in the first character effect that is executed during the second half change. Since it is set to, the action effect performed during the latter half of the change is longer.
Furthermore, the time during which the movable member 440 stays in the operating position is set to 3 seconds in the first character effect produced during the first half variation and 5 seconds in the first character effect produced during the second half variation. Since it is set to, the action effect performed during the latter half of the change is longer.

With this configuration, it is possible to reverse the time during which the movable member 440 stays at the specific position between the first timing and the second timing. As a result, the motion of the movable member 440 does not become monotonous, and it is possible to execute the motion effect with the intonation within one variation. Therefore, the interest of the effect using the movable member 440 can be enhanced.
Further, at the first timing (during the first half change), more game information is displayed on the display device 41 than at the second timing (during the second half change). Therefore, especially when the second specific position (operating position) overlaps the central portion of the display area of the display device 41 as in the present modification, the time during which the movable member 440 stays at the second specific position is By configuring the action effect executed at the first timing to be shorter than the action effect executed at the second timing, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the visibility of the game information.

In this modification, the time during which the movable member 440 stays in the middle position is set to be the same for the first character effect effect executed during the first half variation and the first character effect effect executed during the second half variation. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the time during which the movable member 440 stays at the midway position (first specific position) is during the first half variation (first timing) during the second half variation (second timing). You may comprise so that it may become longer than the 1st accessory production performed.
Further, the first specific position is not limited to the midway position, and may be, for example, the operating position. Further, the second specific position is not limited to the operation position, and may be, for example, an intermediate position.
Further, the first timing is not limited to the first half variation. Further, the second timing is not limited to the latter half fluctuation. For example, the first timing may be before the SP reach is reached during the latter half fluctuation, and the second timing may be after the SP reach is reached during the latter half fluctuation.

Further, the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the accessory effect of the modified example 1 is a gaming machine capable of executing the effect using the movable member 440 in association with the game, and includes the display device 41 and is movable. The member 440 is movable from the first position (initial position) to the second position (intermediate position, operating position) and is capable of emitting light, and is a period during which the movable member 440 moves from the second position to the first position. The emission color of the movable member 440 (the emission color of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440) and the display color of the display device 41 in the same period (the period during which the return operation is performed) are the same system color. Can be configured as.
With such a configuration, the operation (returning operation) of moving the movable member 440 from the second position to the first position becomes inconspicuous, so that the attraction of the effect using the movable member 440 can be enhanced.

Further, the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the accessory effect of the modified example 1 has the effect time of the first effect (first effect effect) executed at the first timing (for example, during the first half fluctuation) and the second timing ( For example, the effect time of the first effect executed in the latter half (during change) can be configured to be different (see FIG. 70(c)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the action effect with the intonation (effect product effect) within one change, and thus it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect using the movable member 440.
In the example shown in FIG. 70(c), the effect time of the first effect (first effect product effect) executed at the first timing (for example, during the first half change) is at the second timing (for example, during the second half change). Although it is shorter than the effect time of the first effect (first accessory effect) that is executed, the opposite may be the case. Also, the effect time of the first effect (first character effect effect) executed at the first timing (for example, changing in the first half), and the first effect (first effect) that is executed at the second timing (for example, changing in the latter half). The production time may be the same as the production time of (production).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 70(c), the first effect (first accessory effect) executed at the first timing (for example, during the first half variation) and the second timing (for example, during the latter half variation) are executed. Although the effect time is made different by providing a difference in the stay time at the operation position with the first effect (first accessory effect), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 70(d), a first effect (first accessory effect) executed at a first timing (for example, changing in the first half) and a first effect executed at second timing (for example, changing in the latter half). The effect time may be different by providing a difference in the number of executions of the first movement operation for one effect (first effect effect).

That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(d), the movable member 440 performs a first moving operation (moving from the initial position to the intermediate position) and a second moving operation (moving from the intermediate position to the operating position). In the first accessory effect, a stirrup effect in which the first moving operation is executed a plurality of times may be performed.
In the example shown in FIG. 70(d), the stirrup effect is performed in the first character effect effect executed during the first-half fluctuation, but the stirrup effect is performed in the first character effect effect executed during the second-half fluctuation. Instead, the first movement operation is performed only once. In this way, by changing the moving manner of the movable member 440 between the first character effect effect during the first half fluctuation and the first character effect effect during the second half fluctuation, it is possible to improve the interest in the second half of the fluctuation. Becomes

The time required to move from the initial position to the midway position may be the same during the first half fluctuation (with a stirrup effect) and during the second half change (without a stirrer effect), or may be different.
Further, the time required to move from the initial position to the middle position may be the same or different between the first accessory effect and the second accessory effect.
In addition, the time required to move from the midway position to the operation position may be the same during the first half fluctuation (with a stirrup effect) and during the second half change (without a stirrer effect), or may be different.

From the above, in the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the accessory effect of the modified example 1, the first effect (first effect effect) is the first operation of the movable member 440 once or a plurality of times (for example, the first effect). The second effect (for example, the second moving operation) is performed after performing the moving operation, and the first effect in which the number of times of the first operation is executed at the first timing (for example, during the first half fluctuation) and the second effect It can be configured so as to be different from the first effect executed at the timing (for example, during the second half change) (see FIG. 70(d)).
With this configuration, not only it is possible to execute the motion effect with the intonation (feature effect) within one variation, but also the movement of the movable member 440 is changed at the first timing (for example, the first half variation). It is possible to make the first effect (first character effect) executed at the middle level different from the first effect (first character effect) executed at the second timing (for example, during the second half variation). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect using the movable member 440.

In the example shown in FIG. 70(d), the number of executions of the first action (for example, the first moving action) in the first effect (first accessory effect) executed at the first timing (for example, during the first half change) is Although it is twice, the number of executions of the first action in the first effect executed at the first timing is not limited to two, and may be one or may be two or more. good.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 70D, the number of executions of the first action (for example, the first moving action) in the first effect (first accessory effect) executed at the second timing (for example, during the second half change) is Although it is once, the number of executions of the first action in the first effect executed at the second timing is not limited to one, and may be multiple times.
In addition, the first operation is performed at one of the first timing and the second timing (the number of executions of the first operation is one or more), and the first operation is performed at the other of the first timing and the second timing. By not performing the operation (setting the number of executions of the first operation to 0), a difference in the number of executions of the first operation is provided, so that the first operation (for example, during the first half change) is executed. The effect time of the first effect (first effect effect) and the effect time of the first effect (first effect effect) executed at the second timing (for example, during the second half change) may be different.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 70D, the effect time of the first effect (first character effect effect) executed at the first timing (for example, during the first half change) is at the second timing (for example, during the second half change). Although it is longer than the effect time of the first effect (first accessory effect) to be executed, the opposite may be the case. That is, in the example illustrated in FIG. 70D, the number of executions of the first operation (for example, the first movement operation) is the second timing (rather than the first effect performed at the first timing (for example, during the first half fluctuation)). For example, the number of the first effects executed in the latter half (during change) is smaller, but the opposite may be the case. In addition, the effect time of the first effect (first role object effect) executed at the first timing (for example, changing in the first half), and the first effect (first effect) performed at the second timing (for example, changing in the latter half). The production time may be the same as the production time of (production).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 70D, the time during which the movable member 440 stays in the operating position is the same in the first character effect effect during the first half fluctuation and the first character effect effect during the second half fluctuation. However, it is not limited to this. That is, the time during which the movable member 440 stays in the operating position is executed at the first timing (first character effect) executed at the first timing (for example, during the first half variation) and the second timing (for example, during the second half variation). It may be different from the first effect (the first accessory effect) that is performed. For example, in one of the first timing and the second timing, the time during which the movable member 440 stays in the operating position is set to 0 second, so that the time during which the movable member 440 stays in the operating position is changed to the first timing (for example, the first half fluctuation). It is also possible to make the first effect (first character effect) executed at the middle) and the first effect (first character effect) executed at the second timing (for example, during the second half change). ..

Moreover, the character effect of the modification 1 can be appropriately combined with the character effect of the above embodiment.
Specifically, for example, similar to the character effect of the above-described embodiment, in the character effect of the modified example 1, the preparatory operation for moving the movable member 440 from the initial position to another position (that is, the stepping motor A concealing effect (for example, an effect of turning off the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 or a blackout image G3 is displayed on the display device 41 for concealing a rattling operation (an operation of slightly moving at a fixed position) caused by the start of excitation. Production, etc.) may be executed.

<Variation 2 of character production>
The effect control device 300, as the first accessory effect in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the operation position via the intermediate position, for example, as shown in FIG. 71(a), the movable member 440 does not stop at the intermediate position. Not only the first character effect in the form (hereinafter referred to as “halfway mode”), but also the first character effect in which the movable member 440 is temporarily stopped at an intermediate position (hereinafter referred to as “halfway stop mode”) can be executed. May be
In this modification, the character effect may be executed during the first half variation, may be executed during the second half variation, or may be performed during the first half variation and the second half variation. May be

When the character effect is an effect that can be executed during the first half variation, for example, in step C386 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54), a character effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the character effect is performed. When the winning character effect lottery is performed (when it is determined to execute the character effect effect), the effect mode distribution table is referred to and the character effect to be executed is the first character object in the middle passing mode. An effect mode selection lottery is performed to determine whether to use the effect or the first character effect in the midway stop mode or the second character effect.
When the character effect is an effect that can be executed during the second half variation, for example, in step C389 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 54), the character effect lottery and the effect mode selection lottery are performed.
Further, when the character effect is an effect that can be executed from the first half variation to the second half variation, for example, in step C386 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 54), the character effect lottery and the effect mode selection lottery. I do.
In this modification, the probability that the halfway mode is selected in the production mode selection lottery (total selection rate of the halfway mode) is the probability that the halfway mode is selected in the production mode selection lottery (total of the halfway mode). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the total selectivity of the midway passage mode may be lower than the total selectivity of the midway stop mode, or is the same as the total selectivity of the midway stop mode. May be.

FIG. 71B shows an example of the effect mode distribution table that is referred to when performing the effect mode selection lottery.
For example, as shown in FIG. 71(b), when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment (other than the big hit), the ratio of executing the first accessory effect in the midway passage mode (in the midway in the production mode selection lottery) Rather than the probability that the first character effect in the passing mode is selected, the probability that the first character effect in the halfway mode will be selected (the probability that the first character effect in the halfway mode will be selected in the mode selection lottery). ) Is lower and the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the ratio of executing the first character effect in the midway passage mode (the first character effect in the midway mode in the mode selection lottery is The probability of executing the first character effect in the midway stop mode (probability that the first character effect in the midway stop mode is selected in the effect mode selection lottery) is higher than the probability). Therefore, in the present modification, by executing the first character effect in the midway stop mode, it can be suggested that the expectation of the big hit is higher than in the case of executing the first character effect in the midway pass mode. it can.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 71(b), when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the ratio of executing the second accessory effect (the second accessory effect is selected in the effect mode selection lottery). Probability of being) is 0%. Therefore, in the present modification, the second character effect is executed only when the result is out of alignment (other than the big hit). Therefore, by executing the first character effect, the second character effect is executed. It can be suggested that the expectation of the jackpot is higher than that of executing.
That is, in the present modification, the expected value (big hit expectation degree) from which the special result mode is derived is in the order of the second character effect <the first character effect of the halfway mode> the first character effect of the halfway mode. It is getting higher.

For example, when the jackpot expectation increases in the order of the second character effect <the first character effect of the halfway stop mode <the first character effect of the halfway mode, or the first character effect of the halfway mode <the In the case where the height increases in the order of the second character effect <the first character effect in the midway passage mode, the player's expectation is lowered when the movable member 440 is stopped at the intermediate position. Further, when the jackpot expectation degree increases in the order of first character effect <second character effect <first character effect of halfway stop mode, or first character effect <halfway mode of halfway mode> In the case where the first character effect in the stop mode is higher in the order of the second character effect, the player's expectation is lowered when the movable member 440 passes the intermediate position (when the movable member 440 does not stop at the intermediate position). Resulting in.

On the other hand, when the jackpot expectation increases in the order of the second character effect <the first character effect of the halfway mode <the first character effect of the halfway mode, the movable member 440 is stopped at the middle position. At that time, whether the character effect being executed is the character effect having the highest jackpot expectation degree (the first character effect in the midway stop mode), or the character effect having the lowest jackpot expectation degree (the second character effect). Since it is unclear whether or not it is an effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in expectation for the movable member 440 to stop at an intermediate position. Further, in this case, since the first accessory production in the midway passage mode is not an accessory production with the lowest big hit expectation degree, but the big hit expectation degree is medium, the movable member 440 may pass the midway position. It is possible to suppress a decrease in expectation for.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the accessory effect of the modified example 2 can generate a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a special result. A game machine, the first effect (first accessory effect) in which the movable member 440 moves to the operation position, and the second effect (second accessory effect) that is partially common to the first effect. Executable in the first effect, the movable member 440 includes the first effect mode (halfway passage mode) in which the movable member 440 moves to the operating position without stopping at the specific position (halfway position). There is a second effect mode (halfway stop mode) in which the movable member 440 stops at the specific position and then moves to the operation position. In the second effect, the movable member 440 stops at the specific position and does not move to the operation position. When the result is not the special result (big hit), the ratio of executing the first effect is lower than the ratio of executing the second effect, and when the game result is the special result, the first effect in the second effect mode is performed. The ratio of performing the effect is configured to be higher than the ratio of executing the first effect in the first effect mode (see FIGS. 71A and 71B).

Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the sense of expectation that the movable member 440 stops at the specific position (the midway position) and a decrease in the sense of expectation that the movable member 440 passes the specific position (the midway position). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect using the movable member 440.
In the example shown in FIG. 71(b), the second accessory effect is not executed in the special figure variation display game which is a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the condition that the jackpot expectation degree becomes higher in the order of the second character effect <the first character effect of the midway passage mode <the first character effect of the halfway stop mode, the result is only for cases other than the big hit. Alternatively, the second accessory effect may be executable even when the result is a big hit.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 71(b), the probability that the first character effect in the midway stop mode is selected in the case of a big hit and the probability that the second character effect is selected in the case of a big hit are They are the same, but they may be different. In the case of a big hit, the probability that the first character effect in the midway stop mode is selected may be 0% or 100%. In addition, the probability that the second accessory effect is selected in the case of the outlier may be 0% or 100%.

In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 71A, for example, the time during which the movable member 440 stops at the operating position is set to 5 seconds in the first accessory production in the midway passage mode, but the time is 5 seconds. The time is not limited to seconds and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, the operation position in the first character effect in the midway passage mode may be the same as or different from the operation position in the first character effect in the midway stop mode. Further, the operation position in the first character effect in the midway passage mode may be the same as the midpoint position in the first character effect in the midway stop mode, or the same midpoint position in the second character effect. Is also good.

Further, in the first accessory production in the midway stop mode, the time for which the movable member 440 stops at the operating position is set to 5 seconds, but the time is not limited to 5 seconds and can be changed as appropriate.
Also, the operation position in the first character effect in the midway stop mode may be the same as or different from the motion position in the first character effect in the midway passage mode. Further, the operation position in the first character effect in the midway stop mode may be the same as the midpoint position in the first character effect in the midpass mode, or the same as the midpoint position in the second character effect. Is also good.

Further, in the second accessory production, the time for which the movable member 440 stops at the midway position is set to 3 seconds, but the time is not limited to 3 seconds and can be changed as appropriate.
In addition, the midway position in the second accessory effect may be the same as or different from the midway position in the first accessory effect in the midway passage mode. The midway position in the second accessory effect may be the same as or different from the operation position in the first accessory effect in the midway passage mode.
Further, the midway position in the second accessory effect may be the same as or different from the midway position in the first accessory effect in the midway stop mode. Further, the midway position in the second accessory effect may be the same as or different from the operation position in the first accessory effect in the midway stop mode.

Further, the time required to move from the initial position to the midway position may be the same or different between the midway passing mode and the midway stopping mode.
Further, the time required to move from the initial position to the middle position may be the same or different between the first accessory effect and the second accessory effect.
The time required to move from the midway position to the operating position may be the same or different between the midway passing mode and the midway stopping mode.

In addition, the character effect of modification 2 can be appropriately combined with the character effect of the above embodiment or the character effect of modification 1.
Specifically, for example, similarly to the character effect of the above-described embodiment, also in the character effect of the modified example 2, a preparatory operation for moving the movable member 440 from the initial position to another position (that is, a stepping motor A concealing effect (for example, an effect of turning off a light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 or displaying a blackout image G3 on the display device 41) for concealing a rattling operation (an operation of slightly moving at a fixed position) caused by the start of excitation. Production, etc.) may be executed.
Further, as shown in, for example, FIG. 71C, in the character effect of the modified example 2 as well as the character effect of the modified example 1, the first timing (for example, during the first half fluctuation) and the first timing different from the first timing. It may be possible to execute at both of two timings (for example, during the second half change), and the selection rate of each performance mode of the character effect may be different at the first timing and the second timing.

<Variation 3 of character production>
For example, as shown in FIG. 72(a), the effect control device 300 allows the movable member 440 to move from an initial position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 66(a)) to an intermediate position as an accessory effect for moving the movable member 440. A first accessory effect that moves to an operation position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 66B; hereinafter referred to as a “first operation position”) and a second accessory effect that the movable member 440 moves from an initial position to an intermediate position. In addition to this, it is possible to execute the third accessory effect in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the second operation position (for example, a position farther from the initial position than the first operation position) via the intermediate position and the first operation position. It may be.

In the present modification, the first movement operation of moving the movable member 440 from the initial position to the intermediate position is an operation that suggests that the likelihood of reach is high, and is executed during the first half fluctuation.
In addition, the second movement operation of moving the movable member 440 from the midway position to the first operation position is an operation that suggests that there is a high degree of expectation of developing SP reach, and is executed during the second half of the change.
Further, the third movement operation of moving the movable member 440 from the midway position to the second operation position is also an operation that suggests that there is a high degree of expectation of developing SP reach, and is executed during the latter half fluctuation.

Specifically, the effect control device 300 performs, in step C386 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54), for example, a character effect lottery for determining whether or not to perform a character effect, and wins the character effect lottery. When it is determined (when it is determined to execute the character effect), whether the character effect to be executed is the first character effect or the second character effect by referring to the effect mode distribution table. A production mode selection lottery for determining whether to make the third accessory production is performed.
The special effect variation lottery targeting the special figure variation display game with reach is more likely to win than the special effect variation lottery targeting the special figure variation display game with no reach. The character effect lottery targeting the variable display game is set to have a higher probability of losing than the character effect lottery targeting the special figure variable display game in which reach occurs. Therefore, in the present modification, it is possible to suggest that the expectation of reach is high by executing the accessory effect (moving the movable member 440).

FIG. 72B shows an example of the effect mode distribution table that is referred to when performing the effect mode selection lottery.
For example, as shown in FIG. 72B, when the reach does not occur in the special figure variation display game, the ratio of executing the second accessory effect (probability that the second accessory effect is selected in the effect mode selection lottery) ) Is set to 100%. That is, when the reach does not occur, the first accessory effect and the third accessory effect are not executed (even if the movable member 440 moves, it does not move to the first operation position or the second operation position). There is. As described above, since the second moving action and the third moving action are actions that suggest that there is a high degree of expectation of developing SP reach, if there is no possibility of developing SP reach (when reach does not occur, ), the first accessory effect for performing the second moving operation and the third accessory effect for performing the third moving operation are not executed.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 72(b), the higher the jackpot expectation degree of the generated reach is, the lower the proportion of the second accessory effect executed is, whereas the expectation degree of the jackpot to be generated is higher. The higher the proportion of the first character effect and the third character effect executed. Therefore, in the present modified example, by executing the first accessory effect and the third accessory effect (the movable member 440 crosses the middle position), there is a possibility that the SP reach can be expected with a higher jackpot. Can be suggested to be high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 72B, for example, when an SP reach (SP3 reach) with the highest jackpot expectation occurs, the ratio of executing the third accessory effect (the third effect in the effect mode selection lottery). The probability that the product effect is selected is the ratio at which the first character effect is executed (the probability that the first character effect is selected in the effect mode selection lottery) or the ratio at which the second character effect is executed (the effect mode selection). It is higher than the probability that the second character effect will be selected in the lottery). Therefore, in this modified example, by executing the third accessory effect, there is a possibility that the SP reach has the highest jackpot expectation degree than in the case of executing the first accessory effect or the second accessory effect. Can be suggested to be high.

In the example shown in FIG. 72(b), the higher the jackpot expectation degree of the reach that is generated, the higher the proportion of execution of the first accessory effect and the third accessory effect is, but not limited to this. ..
That is, the probability that all of the reach will select the first accessory effect in the production mode selection lottery when the reach occurs> in the production mode selection lottery when a reach with a lower jackpot expectation degree than the relevant reach occurs The condition of the probability that the first accessory effect is selected, the probability that the first accessory effect is selected in the effect mode selection lottery when the reach occurs <when a reach with a higher jackpot expectation degree than the reach occurs In addition, although the condition of the probability that the first accessory effect is selected by the production mode selection lottery is satisfied, there may be a reach that does not satisfy these conditions among the plurality of reach. Specifically, for example, the selection ratio of the first accessory effect may be 15% for N reach, 20% for SP1 reach, 15% for SP2 reach, and 30% for SP3 reach.
With such a configuration, it is possible to entertain the SP reach to the player by executing an impact production by the movable member 440 even if the SP reach has a low expectation of a big hit, so that the interest is lowered. Can be suppressed.

In addition, in all the reach, when the reach occurs, the probability that the third accessory effect is selected in the effect mode selection lottery> When the reach with a lower jackpot expectation degree than the reach occurs, the effect mode selection lottery The condition of the probability that the third accessory effect is selected, the probability that the third accessory effect is selected in the effect mode selection lottery when the relevant reach occurs <when a reach with a higher jackpot expectation degree than the relevant reach occurs In addition, although the condition of the probability that the third character effect is selected in the production mode selection lottery is satisfied, there may be a reach that does not satisfy these conditions in the plurality of reach. Specifically, for example, the selection rate of the third accessory effect may be set to 5% for N reach, 20% for SP1 reach, 10% for SP2 reach, and 40% for SP3 reach.
With such a configuration, it is possible to entertain the SP reach to the player by executing an impact production by the movable member 440 even if the SP reach has a low expectation of a big hit, so that the interest is lowered. Can be suppressed.

Further, the third accessory effect may be a big hit confirmation effect that suggests that the result is a big hit. That is, the third accessory effect may be executed only when the result is a big hit.
Alternatively, different information may be suggested according to the light emitting mode of the movable member 440 (light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440) during execution of the third accessory effect. Specifically, for example, there is a high possibility that the light emission mode of the movable member 440 when the movable member 440 arrives at the second operation position is set to the first light emission mode (for example, yellow) to develop into SP reach. It is suggested that the second light emission mode (for example, red) leads to SP reach, and that the third light emission mode (for example, iridescent color) results in a big hit. You can

Further, the character effect of the modification 3 can be appropriately combined with the character effect of the embodiment, the character effect of the modification 1 or the character effect of the modification 2.
Specifically, for example, similarly to the character effect of the above-described embodiment, in the character effect of the modified example 3, the preparatory operation for moving the movable member 440 from the initial position to another position (that is, the stepping motor A concealing effect (for example, an effect of turning off the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 or a blackout image G3 is displayed on the display device 41 for concealing a rattling operation (an operation of slightly moving at a fixed position) caused by the start of excitation. Production, etc.) may be executed.

Further, for example, similarly to the character effect of the modified example 3, in the character effect of the modified example 1 and the character effect of the modified example 2, if the selection ratio of each effect mode of the character effect is different depending on the type of reach that occurs. You may allow it.
In addition, as with the character effect of Modification Example 1, also in the character effect effect of Modification Example 3, both at the first timing (for example, during the first half variation) and at the second timing (for example, during the latter half variation) different from the first timing. It may be executable, and the selection rate of each effect mode of the accessory effect may be different between the first timing and the second timing.
Further, the character effect of the above-described embodiment and the character effects of Modifications 1 to 3 may be effects of operating movable means other than the movable member 440. As movable means other than the movable member 440, for example, one end side is supported by a rotation shaft, and the other end side is not overlapped with the initial position (for example, the display area of the display device 41 by rotating around the rotation shaft). A movable unit that moves from a position) to an operation position (for example, a position overlapping the display area of the display device 41) can be given.

In addition, in the character effect of the above-described embodiment and the character effects of Modifications 1 to 3, the time to stay in the initial position, the time to stay in the middle position, the time to stay in the operating position, and the time from the initial position to the middle position Each time such as the time required for the movement and the time required for the movement from the midway position to the operation position can be appropriately changed within the range of 0 seconds or more. Further, the time of staying in the initial position, the time of staying in the middle position, and the time of staying in the operating position may all be the same, may be different, or may be different only partially. good. Further, the time required to move from the initial position to the midway position and the time required to move from the midway position to the operating position may be the same or different.
In addition, in the character effect of the above-described embodiment and the character effects of modified examples 1 to 3, the selection ratio of each effect mode of the character effect is in the range of 0% to 100% (including 0% and 100%). ) Can be changed appropriately. In addition, the selection rates of the effect modes of the accessory effect may be the same, may be different, or may be different only partially.

<Light emission production>
The effect control device 300 can execute a light emission effect that switches the light emission mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440. In the present embodiment, during the execution of the first reach effect (for example, N reach), the light emission effect that indicates the expectation level of the big hit and the expectation level to develop into another reach effect is executed, and the second reach effect (for example, SP reach). ) Is executed, a light emission effect that indicates the degree of expectation of a big hit is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, as the light emission effect, an effect of switching the light emission mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 from the normal light emission mode to the specific light emission mode is executed.

Production control device 300, for example, in step C389 of the variation production setting process (FIG. 54), performs the first light emission production lottery that determines whether or not the light emission production is executed during the execution of the first reach production.
The first light emission effect lottery targeting the special figure variation display game where the result is a big hit has a higher probability of winning than the first light emission effect lottery targeting the special figure variation display game where the result is other than the big hit. The probability that the first light emission effect lottery targeting the special figure variation display game in which the other than the big hit is higher than the first light emission effect lottery targeting the special figure variation display game in which the result is the big hit becomes higher. It is set. Furthermore, the first light emission effect lottery targeting the special figure variation display game in which SP reach occurs has a higher probability of winning than the first light emission effect lottery targeting the special figure variation display game in which SP reach does not occur, The first luminous effect lottery targeting the special figure variation display game in which SP reach does not occur has a higher probability of losing than the first luminous effect lottery targeting the special figure variation display game in which SP reach occurs. It is set. Therefore, in the present embodiment, two types of information (information that the expectation of a big hit is high and information that the expectation of developing SP reach is high by executing the light emission effect during the execution of the first reach effect. ) Can be suggested.

In addition, for example, in step C389 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54), effect control device 300 performs the second light emission effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the light emission effect during the execution of the second reach effect.
The second light emission effect lottery targeting the special figure variation display game whose result is a big hit has a higher probability of winning than the second light emission effect lottery targeting the special figure variation display game whose result is other than a big hit. The probability that the second light emission effect lottery targeting the special figure variation display game in which the other than the big hit is higher than the second light emission effect lottery targeting the special figure variation display game in which the result is the big hit becomes higher. It is set. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by executing the light emission effect during the execution of the second reach effect, it is possible to suggest one type of information (information that the expectation of a big hit is high).

An example of the light emission effect will be described with reference to FIG. 73.
For example, as shown in FIG. 73(a), when the special figure variation display game won in the first light emission effect lottery and the second light emission effect lottery is started, and, for example, as shown in FIG. 73(b), a reach occurs, For example, as shown in FIG. 73(c), at the start of the first reach effect, the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is changed from the normal light emitting mode that lights in white to the specific light emitting mode that lights in red. Switch. This makes it possible to suggest two types of information (information that the expectation of a big hit is high and information that the expectation of developing SP reach is high). In the example shown in FIG. 73, as the first reach effect, an effect as to whether or not the development symbol stops is performed. In addition, when the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is switched to the specific light emitting mode, an image (for example, a red serif image G5) of a display mode corresponding to the specific light emitting mode is displayed on the display device 41. May be.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73D, for example, the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 returns to the normal light emitting mode. The timing at which the light emission mode returns from the specific light emission mode to the normal light emission mode can be appropriately selected, and for example, even during the first reach effect (that is, before the result of whether the development symbol stops or not is known). It may be good or at the end of the first reach effect (that is, after the result of whether or not the development symbol stops is known). Further, in the example shown in FIG. 73, the development symbol is stopped, but of course, even when the light emission effect is performed during the execution of the first reach effect, the development symbol does not stop (that is, it does not develop into SP reach). )In some cases.

Next, for example, as shown in FIG. 73(e), when the second reach effect is started, the light emission mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is started from the normal light emission mode in which the light is illuminated in white. The mode switches to a light emission mode that suggests the type. For example, if the second reach effect (SP reach) that has started is SP1 reach, it switches from white to blue, if it is SP2 reach, it switches from white to yellow, and if it is SP3 reach, it changes from white to green. Switch to. In addition, the effect suggesting the type of the second reach effect that has started (the effect in which the light emission mode of the light emitting member provided in the movable member 440 switches to the light emitting mode that suggests the type of the second reach effect that has started) is, for example, In the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54 ), a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the effect is performed, and is executed when the lottery is won.
After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 73(f), the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 returns to the normal light emitting mode. In the example shown in FIG. 73, as the second reach effect, a battle effect in which the teammate character fights the enemy character is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(g), for example, in the middle of the second reach effect, the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 changes from the normal light emitting mode of lighting in white to the specific light emitting of lighting in red. Switch to the mode. This makes it possible to suggest one type of information (information that expectation of a big hit is high). In addition, when the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is switched to the specific light emitting mode, an image (for example, a red serif image G5) of a display mode corresponding to the specific light emitting mode is displayed on the display device 41. May be. Further, at the time point shown in FIG. 73(f), the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 may be a specific light emitting mode in which the light is turned on in red. In that case, the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 may be switched from the light emitting mode suggesting the type of the second reach effect that has started to the specific light emitting mode without returning to the normal light emitting mode, It is also possible to return from the light emission mode that indicates the type of the second reach effect that has started to the normal light emission mode, and immediately after that, switch to the specific light emission mode.

Furthermore, by switching to the specific light emission mode at the time shown in FIG. 73(f), it is possible to suggest specific information different from the information that the expectation of a big hit is high (for example, information that a teammate character makes a preemptive attack). Is also good. In that case, the specific light emission mode is switched to suggest the specific information, the normal light emission mode is once returned, and then the character image “preemptive!!” is displayed on the display device 41 to be specified. You may make it suggest the information that the expectation of a big hit is high by switching to the light emission mode. Alternatively, the specific light emission mode is suggested by switching to the specific light emission mode, the specific light emission mode is maintained as it is, and the specific light emission mode is displayed in response to the character image “preemptive!!” being displayed on the display device 41. You may make it suggest the information that the expectation of a big hit is high.

When it is determined that the result of the special figure variation display game being executed in the second reach effect is a big hit (when the teammate character wins), as shown in, for example, FIG. 73(h), the determination is made. At that time, the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is switched from the specific light emitting mode that lights in red to the big hit notification mode that lights in rainbow. This can suggest that the result is a big hit.
Further, when it is determined that the result of the special figure variation display game being executed in the second reach effect is not a big hit (when the teammate character loses), the movable member 440 is provided at the time of the determination. The light emitting mode of the light emitting member returns from the specific light emitting mode that lights in red to the normal light emitting mode that lights in white. This can suggest that the result is not a big hit.

In the present embodiment, the light emitting mode of lighting in white is the normal light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440. However, the light emitting mode is not limited to this, and the normal light emitting mode can be appropriately changed. The normal light emission mode may be, for example, a light emission mode in which the light is turned off.
Further, in the present embodiment, the light emitting mode of lighting in red is the specific light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific light emitting mode can be appropriately changed. The specific light emission mode may be, for example, a light emission mode in which the light is turned off.
Further, in the present embodiment, the rainbow-colored light emission mode is the big hit notification mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit notification mode can be appropriately changed. The jackpot notification mode may be, for example, a light emission mode in which the light is turned off.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing the production using the rendering means (the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440) in association with the game. The specific effect (light emission effect) can be executed by the means, and the specific effect executed at the first timing (during execution of the first reach effect) is expected to be the first information (the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit). Degree) and second information (the degree of expectation to develop into another reach effect), and the specific effect executed at the second timing (during execution of the second reach effect) different from the first timing is the first effect. The information is suggestable but the second information is not suggestable (see FIG. 73).
Therefore, since the information suggested by the specific effect differs depending on the timing of executing the specific effect using the effect means (the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440), the interest of the effect using the effect means can be enhanced. ..

The first information is not limited to the degree of expectation that the result of the special figure variation display game will be a big hit, and can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the second information is not limited to the degree of expectation of developing another reach effect, and can be changed as appropriate.
The first reach effect is not limited to N reach. The first reach effect may be, for example, a weak SP reach with low expectation, or an SP reach first half effect that appears in the first half of the SP reach.
The second reach effect is not limited to SP reach. The second reach effect may be, for example, a strong SP reach with a high degree of expectation, or an SP reach second half effect that appears in the second half of the SP reach.

Further, the specific effect using the effect means (the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440) may be an effect in which the effect means blinks in a predetermined color (for example, red). That is, two types of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high and information that the expectation of developing SP reach is high) are suggested by the effect means blinking in red during the execution of the first reach effect. At the same time, the effect means may flash red during execution of the second reach effect to suggest one type of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high).
Furthermore, when the specific effect using the effecting means (the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440) is the effect of blinking in a predetermined color (for example, red), as shown in FIG. The blinking period may be different during the execution of the first reach effect and the execution of the second reach effect.

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect means is the light emitting means (the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440), and the specific effect is the effect that the light emitting means blinks, and the light emission of the light emitting means. The color is the same in the specific effect executed at the first timing (during execution of the first reach effect) and the specific effect executed at the second timing (during execution of the second reach effect), and the light emission is the same. The flashing cycle of the means can be configured to be different between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing (see FIG. 74(a)).
With such a configuration, not only the information suggested by the specific effect differs depending on the timing of executing the specific effect using the effect means (the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440), but also the blinking cycle depending on the timing. Since they are different, the player can easily recognize that the suggested information is different due to the difference in the blinking period.

In the example shown in FIG. 74(a), the blinking period during the execution of the first reach effect is longer than the blinking period during the execution of the second reach effect, but the opposite is true. good.
Further, the blinking cycle during the execution of the first reach effect can be appropriately changed within the range of 0 seconds or more.
Further, the blinking cycle during the execution of the second reach effect can be appropriately changed within the range of 0 seconds or more.
Further, instead of making the blinking cycle different between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing, for example, the number of times of blinking (including 0 times) may be different. The cumulative time for emitting light with a predetermined brightness (for example, maximum brightness) (predetermined brightness light emission cumulative time, including 0 seconds) may be different, or the cumulative time for emitting light with a predetermined color (for example, red) (predetermined color light emission accumulation) The time (including 0 seconds) may be different.
In the example shown in FIG. 74(a), the red light emission accumulated time during execution of the first reach effect is longer than the red light emission accumulated time during execution of the second reach effect, but the opposite is true. May be.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 74(a), when the second reach effect is started, an effect suggesting the type of the second reach effect that has started (for example, the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 starts Although the effect of switching to the light emission mode suggesting the type of the second reach effect) is not executed, it may be executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 74(a), the movable member 440 is provided at the time when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed in the second reach effect is determined (at the time when the battle effect is won or lost). When the light emitting mode of the light emitting member has returned to the normal light emitting mode (for example, the light emitting mode of lighting in white), but it is determined that the result of the special figure variation display game being executed in the second reach effect is a big hit ( When the teammate character wins), the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 may be switched to a big hit notification mode (for example, a light emitting mode that lights in rainbow color) at the time of confirmation.

Further, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment is a game machine capable of executing a specific effect using an effect means (a light emitting member provided on the movable member 440) in association with the game, and the specific effect is The effect means is an effect in which a predetermined mode (lighting and extinction) is repeated, and the predetermined mode is a specific effect executed at a first timing (during execution of the first reach effect) and a second timing different from the first timing. The specific effect executed in (during execution of the second reach effect) is the same, and the repetition cycle of the predetermined mode is the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing. , And can be configured differently (see FIG. 74(a)).
With such a configuration, since the repeating cycle varies depending on the timing of executing the specific effect using the effecting means (the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440), it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect using the effecting means. ..
Note that the effect that repeats the predetermined mode is not limited to the effect (flashing effect) in which lighting and extinction are alternately repeated, and for example, lighting in the first color (for example, white) and lighting in the second color (for example, red) The production may be repeated alternately.
Further, the rendering means is not limited to the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440, and may be a light emitting means other than the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440.

Further, the rendering means is not limited to the light emitting means, and may be the movable member 440, for example. Specifically, the specific effect using the effect means may be an effect in which the movable member 440 performs a predetermined operation (for example, a first moving operation). That is, by performing the first movement operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the midway position during the execution of the first reach effect, two types of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high and SP reach are generated). One type of information (for example, a big hit) is suggested by performing a first movement operation in which the movable member 440 moves from an initial position to an intermediate position while performing the second reach effect while suggesting that the degree of expectation for development is high. Information that the degree of expectation is high) may be suggested.

Further, the specific effect using the effect means may be an effect in which the movable member 440 repeats a predetermined operation (for example, the first movement operation). That is, two types of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high and SP can be achieved by performing the first moving operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the midway position multiple times during the execution of the first reach effect. Information indicating that there is a high degree of expectation that it will develop to reach), and one type of information by performing the first moving operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the intermediate position multiple times during the execution of the second reach effect. (For example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high) may be suggested.
Further, when the specific effect using the effect means is an effect in which the movable member 440 repeats a predetermined operation (for example, the first moving operation), the first reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 74(b), for example. The repeating cycle may be different between the middle and the second reach effect being executed.

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect means is the movable means (movable member 440), and the specific effect is the effect that the movable means repeats the predetermined operation (for example, the first movement operation), and the predetermined operation. Is the same for the specific effect executed at the first timing (during execution of the first reach effect) and the specific effect executed at the second timing (during execution of the second reach effect), and the predetermined operation The repetition cycle of can be configured to be different between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing (see FIG. 74(b)).
With such a configuration, not only the information suggested by the specific effect differs depending on the timing of executing the specific effect using the effect means (movable member 440), but also the repetition cycle differs depending on the timing, and thus the player , It is possible to easily recognize that the suggested information differs depending on the difference in the repetition period.

The predetermined operation is not limited to the first moving operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the intermediate position. That is, the predetermined operation may be an operation of moving the movable member 440 from the initial position to another position (for example, an intermediate position or an operating position), or an operation of rotating the rotating body 441. Other operations may be used.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 74(b), the repetition cycle during the execution of the first reach effect is longer than the repetition cycle during the execution of the second reach effect, but the opposite is true. good.
Further, the repetition cycle during the execution of the first reach effect can be appropriately changed within the range of 0 seconds or more.
Further, the repetition cycle during the execution of the second reach effect can be appropriately changed within the range of 0 seconds or more.
Further, the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing do not have to have different repeating cycles, but may have different repeating times (including 0 times), for example. The cumulative time that the movable member 440 stays at a predetermined position (for example, an intermediate position) (predetermined position stay cumulative time, including 0 seconds) may be different. In the example shown in FIG. 74(b), the midway position stay cumulative time during execution of the first reach effect is longer than the midway position stay cumulative time during execution of the second reach effect, but vice versa. May be

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing a specific effect using the effect means (movable member 440) in association with the game, and the effect is a predetermined mode in the specific effect. (For example, a first moving operation) is an effect to be repeated, and the predetermined mode is a specific effect executed at a first timing (during execution of the first reach effect) and a second timing (second reach) different from the first timing. It is the same as the specific effect executed in (during execution of effect), and the repetition cycle of the predetermined mode is different between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing. (See FIG. 74(b)).
With such a configuration, since the repeating cycle varies depending on the timing of executing the specific effect using the effecting means (movable member 440), it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect using the effecting means.
The predetermined mode is not limited to the first movement operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the intermediate position. That is, the predetermined mode may be an operation of moving the movable member 440 from the initial position to another position (for example, an intermediate position or an operating position), or an operation of rotating the rotating body 441. Other operations may be used.
Further, the effect means is not limited to the movable member 440, and may be a movable means other than the movable member 440.

Further, the rendering means is not limited to the light emitting means and the movable means, and may be the display device 41, for example. Specifically, the specific effect using the effect means may be an effect of displaying a predetermined image (for example, the dialogue image G5 of the ally character) on the display device 41. For example, as shown in FIG. 73(c), during execution of the first reach effect, a dialogue image G5 of the teammate character (for example, a character image "Stop the development pattern!" and a balloon image surrounding it) is displayed. .. In addition, as shown in FIG. 73(g), for example, while the second reach effect is being executed, the dialogue image G5 of the teammate character (for example, the character image "preemption!!" and the balloon image surrounding it) is displayed. To be done. That is, by displaying the dialogue image G5 of the ally character on the display device 41 during the execution of the first reach effect, two types of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high and an expectation that the SP reach is developed). In addition to suggesting that it is high, one type of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high) is suggested by displaying the dialogue image G5 of the teammate character on the display device 41 during execution of the second reach effect. It may be done.
Further, when the specific effect using the effecting means is an effect of displaying the dialogue image G5 of the teammate character on the display device 41, for example, as shown in FIG. 74(c), the first reach effect is being executed. , The cumulative time for displaying the dialogue image G5 of the teammate character on the display device 41 (the dialogue image display cumulative time) may be different from that during the execution of the second reach effect.

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect means is the display means (display device 41), and the specific effect is the effect of displaying the dialogue image G5 of the predetermined character (allied character) on the display means. The character is the same in the specific effect executed at the first timing (during execution of the first reach effect) and the specific effect executed at the second timing (during execution of the second reach effect). The display cumulative time (cumulative image display cumulative time) obtained by accumulating the time for displaying G5 may be configured to be different between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing. It is possible (see FIG. 74(c)).
With such a configuration, not only the information suggested by the specific effect differs depending on the timing of executing the specific effect using the effect means (display device 41), but also the accumulated display time (the dialogue image display accumulated time ) Is also different, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the suggested information is different due to the difference in display accumulated time.

The predetermined character is not limited to the teammate character and may be an enemy character, or may be both a teammate character and an enemy character.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 74(c), the display accumulated time during execution of the first reach effect is shorter than the display accumulated time during execution of the second reach effect, but the opposite is true. May be.
Further, the display accumulated time during the execution of the first reach effect can be appropriately changed within the range of 0 seconds or more.
Further, the display accumulated time during the execution of the second reach effect can be appropriately changed within the range of 0 seconds or more.
In addition, instead of making the dialogue effect display cumulative time different between the particular effect executed at the first timing and the particular effect executed at the second timing, for example, the number of times the serif image G5 is displayed (the number of appearances: 0 times). May be different), or when the serif image G5 is displayed periodically, the cycle (including 0 seconds) may be different.

Further, the specific effect using the effect means may be an effect of displaying an image other than the dialogue image G5 on the display device 41. Specifically, the specific effect using the effect means may be an effect of displaying a character image G6 of a predetermined character (for example, a ally character) on the display device 41. That is, by displaying the character image G6 of the teammate character on the display device 41 during the execution of the first reach effect, two types of information (for example, information that the expectation of the big hit is high and the expectation that the SP reach is developed). It is suggested that one type of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high) is displayed by displaying the character image G6 of the teammate character on the display device 41 during execution of the second reach effect. It may be done.
Furthermore, when the specific effect using the effect means is an effect for displaying the character image G6 on the display device 41, the display device 41 is in execution of the first reach effect and in execution of the second reach effect. The cumulative time for displaying the character image G6 (character image cumulative cumulative time, including 0 seconds) may be different, and the display count (the number of appearances, including 0 times) of the character image G6 may be different. However, when the character image G6 is displayed periodically, the cycle (including 0 seconds) may be different.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing a specific effect using the display means (display device 41) in association with the game, and the specific effect is displayed on the display means as the first. This is an effect for displaying an image (a character image G6 of an ally character) and a second image (a serif image G5 of an ally character), and the first image is executed at the first timing (during execution of the first reach effect). The specific effect is the same as the specific effect executed at the second timing (during execution of the second reach effect) different from the first timing, and the accumulated display time (the dialog time) in which the time for displaying the second image is accumulated. The image display cumulative time) can be configured to be different between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing (see FIG. 74(c)).
With such a configuration, the display accumulated time (serif image display accumulated time) differs depending on the timing of executing the specific effect using the display unit (display device 41), and therefore the attraction of the effect using the display unit is enhanced. You can

The first image is not limited to the character image G6 of the ally character, and may be the character image G6 of the enemy character, the character image G6 of the ally character and the enemy character, or the dialogue, for example. It may be the image G5.
Further, the second image is not limited to the dialogue image G5 of the teammate character, and may be, for example, the dialogue image G5 of the enemy character, the dialogue image G5 of the teammate character or the enemy character, or the character. It may be the image G6.
Further, the rendering means is not limited to the display device 41, and may be a display means other than the display device 41.

Further, the production means is not limited to the light emitting means, the movable means, and the display means, and may be, for example, the speakers 19a and 19b. Specifically, the specific effect using the effect means may be an effect in which a predetermined effect sound (for example, a serif sound of a teammate character) is output from the speakers 19a and 19b. For example, as shown in FIG. 73(c), during execution of the first reach effect, a dialogue image G5 of the teammate character (for example, a character image "Stop the development pattern!" and a balloon image surrounding it) is displayed. However, at that time, the serif sound of the teammate character (for example, the sound "stop development pattern!") may be output from the speakers 19a and 19b. In addition, as shown in FIG. 73(g), for example, while the second reach effect is being executed, the dialogue image G5 of the teammate character (for example, the character image "preemption!!" and the balloon image surrounding it) is displayed. However, at that time, the serif sound of the teammate character (for example, the sound "preemptive!!!!") may be output from the speakers 19a and 19b. That is, two types of information (for example, the information that the expectation of a big hit is high and the expectation to develop into SP reach are output by outputting the serif sound of the teammate character from the speakers 19a and 19b during the execution of the first reach effect. It is suggested that one type of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high) is displayed by displaying the dialogue sound of the teammate character from the speakers 19a and 19b during execution of the second reach effect. It may be done.
Further, when the specific effect using the effecting means is an effect in which the dialogue sound of the teammate character is output from the speakers 19a and 19b, for example, as shown in FIG. 74(d), the first reach effect is being executed. The cumulative time (serif sound output cumulative time) for outputting the serif sound of the teammate character from the speakers 19a and 19b may be different during execution of the second reach effect.

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect means is the sound output means (speakers 19a, 19b), and the specific effect is the effect of outputting the serif sound of the predetermined character (allied character) from the sound output means. The predetermined character is the same in the specific effect executed at the first timing (during the execution of the first reach effect) and the specific effect executed at the second timing (during the execution of the second reach effect), The output cumulative time (cumulative sound output cumulative time) obtained by accumulating the time to output the serif sound is configured to be different between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing. (See FIG. 74(d)).
With this configuration, not only the information suggested by the specific effect differs depending on the timing of executing the specific effect using the effect means (speakers 19a and 19b), but also the output cumulative time (serif sound output accumulation) depends on the timing. Since the time) is also different, the player can easily recognize that the suggested information is different due to the difference in the output cumulative time.

The predetermined character is not limited to the teammate character and may be an enemy character, or may be both a teammate character and an enemy character.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 74(d), the output cumulative time during execution of the first reach effect is shorter than the output cumulative time during execution of the second reach effect, but the opposite is true. May be.
Further, the output cumulative time during the execution of the first reach effect can be appropriately changed within the range of 0 seconds or more.
In addition, the output cumulative time during execution of the second reach effect can be appropriately changed within the range of 0 seconds or more.
Also, instead of making the serif sound output cumulative time different between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing, for example, the number of times the serif sound is output (the number of appearances. (Including) may be different, or when the serif sound is periodically output, the cycle (including 0 second) may be different.

Further, the specific effect using the effect means may be an effect in which an effect sound other than the dialogue sound is output from the speakers 19a and 19b. Specifically, the specific effect using the effect means may be an effect in which a specific effect sound (for example, an effect sound such as "Cuein!") is output from the speakers 19a and 19b. That is, by outputting specific sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b during the execution of the first reach effect, two types of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high and an expectation that the SP reach is developed are high). Information), and by outputting a specific sound effect from the speakers 19a and 19b during execution of the second reach effect, one kind of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high) is suggested. Is also good.
Further, when the specific effect using the effect means is an effect in which the specific effect sound is output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the speaker 19a is being executed during the execution of the first reach effect and the execution of the second reach effect. , 19b, the cumulative time for outputting the specific sound effect (specific sound effect output cumulative time) may be different, the number of times of outputting the specific sound effect (the number of appearances) may be different, and the specific sound effect is cycled. In the case of outputting in a random manner, the cycle may be different.
Moreover, the effect means is not limited to the speakers 19a and 19b, and may be sound output means other than the speakers 19a and 19b.

Further, the first timing is not limited to during execution of the first reach effect. Further, the second timing is not limited to during execution of the second reach effect. For example, the first timing may be changed during the first half and the second timing may be changed during the second half.
Further, a specific effect using the light emitting means (see FIG. 74(a)), a specific effect using the movable means (see FIG. 74(b)), a specific effect using the display means (see FIG. 74(c)), The specific effects using the sound output means (see FIG. 74(c)) can be appropriately combined and applied.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing a specific effect using the display means (display device 41) and the sound output means (speakers 19a, 19b) in association with the game. The specific effect is an effect in which a specific image (a character image G6 of a teammate character) is displayed on the display unit and a specific sound (a serif sound of a teammate character) is output from the sound output unit, and the specific image is the first timing ( The specific effect executed during the execution of the first reach effect) and the specific effect executed at the second timing (during execution of the second reach effect) different from the first timing are the same, and the specific sound is generated. The output cumulative time (cumulative sound output cumulative time) obtained by accumulating the output time can be configured to be different between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing ( See FIG. 74(d)).
With this configuration, the cumulative output time (serif sound cumulative time) varies depending on the timing of executing the specific effect using the display unit (display device 41) and the sound output unit (speakers 19a and 19b). It is possible to enhance the interest of the production using the means and the sound output means.

The specific image is not limited to the character image G6 of the teammate character, and may be the character image G6 of the enemy character, the character image G6 of the teammate character and the enemy character, or the dialogue image, for example. It may be G5.
Further, the specific sound is not limited to the serif sound of the teammate character, and may be the serif sound of the enemy character, the serif sound of the teammate character and the enemy character, or the specific sound effect ( For example, it may be a sound effect such as “Cuein!”.

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and other gaming machines such as other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines using the game balls. Further, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, but includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines that use game balls.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope. Further, the configurations of the above-described embodiments and modified examples can be appropriately combined and applied.

10 Gaming machines 19a, 19b Speakers (production means, sound output means)
25 Performance button (operation means)
38 1st special variable prize device (variable prize device)
39 2nd special variable prize device (variable prize device)
41 display device (production means, display means)
44 Board production device (movable production device)
46 Board decoration device (light emitting effect device)
100 game control device (advance determination means, setting means)
300 Performance control device (display control means)
440 Movable member (production means, movable means)
G2 operation promotion image G5 dialogue image

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which a game is executed based on establishment of a start condition, and a variable winning device is opened when the result of the game is a special result,
Prior determination means for determining the game before the game is executed,
Display control means for displaying a symbol combination mode corresponding to the result of the game on a display device,
In the symbol combination mode, there are a plurality of types of symbol combination modes showing different numbers of times of opening as the number of times of opening the variable winning device,
The display control means,
When it is determined that the special game state occurs a plurality of times based on the determination result of the pre-determination means, it is possible to execute a replacement effect that replaces the symbol combination mode displayed on the display device,
In the replacement effect, each time the game is executed, instead of the control of displaying the symbol combination mode corresponding to the result of the game, the variable winning device in the special game state of the plurality of games over a plurality of games. A gaming machine characterized by performing control to display a symbol combination mode showing the total number of times of opening.

Images